Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-XS350
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.
≥This DVD recorder is equipped with a Common Interface. It can receive encrypted and free-to-air DVB-S/S2 services.
≥The tuner in this unit is only compatible with DVB-S/S2.
Region management information
DVD-Video
Example:
This unit plays DVD-Video marked with labels containing the region number “2” or “ALL”.
2
3
2
ALL
5
Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com
RQT9439-L
EG
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Included accessories
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of September 2009. These may be subject to change.)
∏
∏
∏
(N2QAYB000340)
1
Remote control
2
Batteries
for remote control
1
AC mains lead
For use with this unit only. Do not use it with
other equipment.
Also, do not use cords for other equipment with
this unit.
∫ The remote control information
Batteries
Use
≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
Remote control signal sensor
20
R6/LR6, AA
20
30
≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not heat or expose to flame.
30
7 m directly in front of the unit
≥Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct
sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.
≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
The distance and angles are an approximate.
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
RQT9439
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
Advanced timer recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Manually programming timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
To release the unit from timer recording standby. . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
To cancel recording when timer recording
has already begun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
TV Guide data download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Getting started
Getting started
Characteristics of this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Included accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Quick Start Guide
HDD and disc information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Recording high definition programmes and copying . . . . . . . . . . . 7
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Discs that cannot be played . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
USB memory and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
USB memories you can use on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cards you can use on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Control reference guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Playing back
Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Display the subtitle during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Display the Teletext during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play
—DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Switching of the Navigator [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Playback the title that was viewed once [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
To change the Genre Label [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
To play grouped titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
To edit the group of titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Playback of the High Definition Video (AVCHD) . . . . . .41
Playback of the playlist created
on other equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Playing DivX® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Playing DivX video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Easy access to various functions
— FUNCTION MENU display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card) . . . . . . . . 15
Inserting discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Inserting, removing the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Inserting, removing the SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Disc and card care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Editing
STEP 1 Inserting the CAM
Editing titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Title operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Create/Playback/Edit of the Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Create Chapter Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Editing and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Chapter operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
(Conditional Access Module) and Smart Card . . . . . . 16
STEP 2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
STEP 3 Channel reception settings and
TV aspect settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
STEP 4 Setting the CI or CI Plus
(Common Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Copying
Basic operations
Copying titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Copy Title Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Copying using the copying list—Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
Watching digital broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Playing DVD-Video/
Playing recorded video contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Playing DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Playing recorded video contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
(DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Recording television programmes [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
To specify a time to stop recording
—One Touch Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Timer Recording using the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
With Other Equipment
Recording broadcasts from external equipment . . . . .55
Recording from Set Top Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Linked timer recordings with external equipment (Set Top Box)
— EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Copying from a video equipment
(video cassette recorder, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
DV Automatic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Flexible Recording via AV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Deleting during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Copying titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Advanced watching digital broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
To show subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Switching audio of the TV broadcast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
To select content in the digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
To show Teletext. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Copy the HD Video (AVCHD format)
or the SD Video (MPEG2 format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Copying HD Video (AVCHD format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Copying SD Video (MPEG2 format). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Title
Recording
Advanced recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Recording method and disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Recording modes and recording contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2 programmes simultaneous recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Types of recording data for copyright protected titles . . . . . . . . . 30
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Operation during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
RQT9439
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Deleting all titles—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Enabling the unit’s recording function—Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Selecting the background style—Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
Still pictures
Still pictures
Playing still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Editing still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Still pictures operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Copying new still pictures on the SD card
—Copy New Pictures ( JPEG ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory
—Copy All Pictures ( JPEG ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
—Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Finalising—Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
DVB Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
HDD / Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Music
Music
Software (firmware) Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Update software (firmware) of this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
CI Plus compatible CAM (Conditional Access Module)
software (firmware) update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
HOLD function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Connecting a television with AUDIO/VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . 96
Connecting a television with
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Connecting VCR or Set Top Box
(Terrestrial receiver, CATV, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal. . . . . . . . . . 97
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television
Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Playing MP3 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Playing music CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Playing music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Editing music/playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Editing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Album and track operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Register track to Playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Editing Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playlist operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
About the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Copying music from a disc or a USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
and receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Network connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Others
Convenient functions
Reference
Operations that can be performed
simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Operations that can be performed while recording
or copying a title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Starting of the timer recording while
Linked operations with the TV
(VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link). . . . . . . . . . . .72
Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Enjoying VIERA CASTTM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
To pause the TV programme you are watching
—Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
DLNA feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Playing back from
Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Playing back from
non-Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Convenient functions to playback and
viewing or listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
executing other operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
When removing a recorded disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
RQT9439
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
Quick Start
Guide
This unit can record or copy to the following HDD or discs.
Internal
DDVVDD--RRAAMM DDVVDD--RR
HHDDDD
DDVVDD--RR DDLL DDVVDD--RRWW
++RRWW
++RR
++RR DDLL
You can record the programme of the digital broadcast to the HDD by using this unit’s tuner.
Recording by pressing [¥ REC] button
It can only record to HDD by pressing [¥ REC] in DR mode (> 28).
HDD
REC
Timer recording
It can only record to HDD when using timer record.
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
WED, 27.05.2009
KiKa
Landscape
All Types
0:00
All DVB Channels
HDD
3
23:00-23:45 Factory Tour
Time: 23:00
23:30
0:30
1:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ZDF
sat
Hunter. \*Episode 5\*
Bruder
3
Frankfurt
Valley
News
KiKa
Factory Tour
Unser Auto
ZDFinfok
ZDFdokuk
ZDFtheat
DKULTUR
Wandern im Wald
Ökosystem Savanne
Planète insolite
Sonderberichte
PLATINUM/MARS
Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden
Hier ist die Familie
Select Channel
OK
Page Up
CH
Page Down
Info
OPTION
Select Programme
GUIDE
Change display mode
RETURN
-24 hours
+24 hours
Prog. Type
Category
≥Discs can be recorded from the external equipment. Discs that can be recorded will differ depending on the recording method.
For details, please refer to “Recording method and disc” on page 28.
RQT9439
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording high definition programmes and copying
This unit will record the high definition quality programmes§1 of the digital broadcast onto the HDD with high quality image and audio as it was
broadcasted.
If copying is performed on those programmes, they are copied in standard definition.
Programmes in high definition (HD) quality
Goal!
Recording
HHDDDD
DR mode
Goal!
≥Record as high definition (HD) quality
≥All subtitles, multiple audio and Teletext are
recorded.
Time and quality of recording varies depending on
COPY
the recording mode. (> 28, Recording modes and
recording contents)
Discs
XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode
≥Copy as standard definition (SD) quality
≥Copy in Normal Speed mode
≥Only one subtitle can be copied.§2
≥Only one audio can be copied for the multiple audio.
≥Teletext can be copied. [Copy Title Playing only (> 51)]§3
§1
It will also record standard definition programmes of the digital broadcast with the same quality of image and audio as broadcasted.
You cannot switch the subtitle on or off during the playback of the copied title.
You cannot operate the Teletext during the playback of the copied title. (> 27)
§2
§3
RQT9439
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
Disc type
Hard disk drive (HDD)
Standard symbol
[HDD]
Data that can be recorded and played
Quality in which video is recorded
Recording mode in which video is recorded
Video/Still picture/Music
High definition (HD) quality/Standard definition (SD) quality
DR, HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
Rewritable
≤
≤
≤
Timer recording
Recording of copyright protected titles (> 30)
≥Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods. For details, please refer to the respective operating.
RQT9439
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc type
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
DVD-RW
Standard symbol
[-R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[-R]DL] before finalisation [-RW‹V›] before finalisation
[RAM]
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
Data that can be recorded and
played
Video
Still picture
Video
Quality in which video is recorded
Standard definition (SD) quality
Recording mode in which video is
recorded
XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
Rewritable
≤
–
–
≤
Timer recording
Recording of copyright protected
titles (> 30)
≤
–
CRPM (> 114)
compatible discs only.
Play on other players
[RAM] can be played back ≥Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment.
on Panasonic DVD
≥[-R]DL] can be played back only on equipment compatible with this disc.
recorders and DVD-RAM
compatible DVD players.
Note
–
–
Disc type
+R
+R DL
+RW
Standard symbol
[+R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[+R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[+RW]
Data that can be recorded and
played
Video
Quality in which video is recorded
Standard definition (SD) quality
XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
Recording mode in which video is
recorded
Rewritable
–
≤
Timer recording
–
–
Recording of copyright protected
titles (> 30)
Play on other players
≥Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment.
≥[+R]DL] can be played back only on equipment compatible with this
disc.
≥[+RW] can be played back only on
equipment compatible with this
disc.
≥If the disc failed to play on other
equipment, we recommend you
create top menu (> 82).
Note
≥[+R] [+R]DL] recorded with this unit or with another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible.
However, discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.
≥8X Speed +RW disc is not supported.
≥Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods. For details, please refer to the respective operating.
[Note]
≥Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be used for recording on this unit.
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
≥Recording-restricted or copy-restricted programmes may not be recorded depending on the type of discs (including HDD) or recording mode.
∫ Regarding 8 cm Disc
This unit cannot record or edit the 8 cm DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R DL or +RW.
Only playback or copy to the HDD is possible.
RQT9439
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
Play-only discs
Disc type
Logo
Standard symbol
Uses
DVD-Video
[DVD-V]
Movie and music discs
DVD-RW (DVD
Video
Recording
format)
[-RW‹VR›]
DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder
≥By formatting (> 81) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video
format.
≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for
recording.
DivX®, MP3,
JPEG
≥DVD-R§ and DVD-R DL§ with video recorded in DivX
≥DVD-R§ and DVD-R DL§ with music recorded in MP3
≥DVD-R§ and DVD-R DL§ with still pictures recorded in JPEG
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
≥Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW§)
CD
[CD]
DivX®, MP3,
JPEG
≥CD-R§ and CD-RW§ with video recorded in DivX
≥CD-R§ and CD-RW§ with music recorded in MP3
≥CD-R§ and CD-RW§ with still pictures recorded in JPEG
–
–
Disc with high
definition
video(AVCHD)
recorded by
Panasonic’s
video camera,
etc.
[AVCHD]
Following disc can be played.
≥DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW
≥Only the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R or +R DL which was
finalised (> 114) with the same equipment that was used to record
can be played.
§
Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
Discs that cannot be played
≥Blu-ray Disc (BD-Video, BD-RE, BD-R)
≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalised (> 114).
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL”
≥DVD-Audio
≥HD DVD
≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD, SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, Video CD, etc.
RQT9439
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB memory and card information
USB memories you can use on this unit
USB memories can only be used for playback or copy to HDD or discs.
Compatible USB memories
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class and digital camera that use PTP
protocol:
–USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.
≥USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.
≥USB memories that support bulk only transfer.
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
≥Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not
supported.
≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.
≥A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.
Format
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.
≥UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.
≥Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.
≥Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.
Indicated in these instructions [USB]
by
Data that can be played
Data that can be copied
DivX, MP3, Still pictures (JPEG)
MP3
≥It can be copied to HDD.
Still pictures (JPEG)
≥It can be copied to HDD or DVD-RAM.
Standard Definition (SD) Video (MPEG2 format)
High Definition (HD) Video (AVCHD format)
≥SD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 59)
≥HD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD. (> 58)
≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
[Note]
≥This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
Cards you can use on this unit
SD cards can be used for playback, copy to HDD or discs or copy from HDD or discs.
SD Memory Card§1 (from 8 MB to 2 GB)
Type
SDHC Memory Card§2 (from 4 GB to 32 GB)
§1
Including miniSD Card and microSD Card
§2
Including miniSDHC Card and microSDHC Card
The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.
Indicated in these instructions [SD]
by
Data that can be played
Still pictures (JPEG)
HD Video (AVCHD format)
Data that can be copied
Still pictures (JPEG)
≥It can be copied to/from HDD or DVD-RAM.
Standard Definition (SD) Video (MPEG2 format)
High Definition (HD) Video (AVCHD format)
≥SD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 59)
≥HD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD. (> 58)
Instructions
You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
≥A miniSD Card, a miniSDHC Card, a microSD Card and microSDHC Card must be used with the adaptor
that comes with the card.
Suitable SD cards
≥When using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display the SDHC logo can be used.
≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/
(This site is in English only.)
≥If the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary for recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a PC, you
may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (> 81, 114).
≥This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in
FAT32 format.
≥SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC Memory
Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.
≥We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.
≥Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
∫ Setting the protection
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.
RQT9439
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control reference guide
Remote control
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on or off (> 18)
2 Select drive (HDD, DVD or SD) (> 21)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers or
characters (The character buttons may be used when operating
VIERA CAST contents.)
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 24, 35)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
6 Show digital channel information (> 26)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 36)/Show status messages (> 79)
7 Selection/OK, Select station from Channel List (> 20)/Frame-by-
frame (> 38)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 21)/Top menu (> 21)
9 Show OPTION menu (> 44, 62, 69)
This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still pictures,
etc.
: Skip the specified time (> 38)
; Colour buttons
Use in accordance with instruction on the screen.
< Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 22)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 55)
= Show teletext (> 27, 38)
TV
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
PAGE
CH
abc
2
jkl
5
def
3
1
4
mno
ghi
6
p
w
xyz
qrs
tuv
7 8
9
PROG/CHECK
INPUT
DEL
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
> Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (> 26)
? Transmit the remote control signal
@ Television operations (> 95)
A Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 22, 36)
B Show VIERA CAST (> 74)
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
STATUS
I
C Input select (TV, AV1, AV2, AV3 or DV) (> 20, 22, 55, 56)
D Show Timer Recording screen (> 33)
E Exit the menu screen
F Show the TV Guide screen (> 20, 36)
G Show FUNCTION MENU window (> 13)
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the
main functions (playback, recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
H Return to previous screen
OK
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
I Create chapter (> 47)
J Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 38)
K Direct TV Recording (> 72)
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
L EXT LINK function (> 55)
M Show on-screen menu (> 77)
TEXT
STTL
AUDIO DISPLAY
N Select audio (> 26, 38)
Main unit
Pull to flip down the front
panel.
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 18)
9 SD card slot (> 15)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of
power.
: USB port (> 15)
; Channel select (> 20)
< Start recording (> 22)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 22)
= Stop (> 22, 37)
2 Disc tray (> 15)
3 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (> 56)
4 Display (> 13)
> Start play
Rear panel terminals (> 17, 96–99)
5 Recording indicator
6 Remote control signal sensor
RQT9439
7 Connection for VCR, Panasonic’s video camera, etc. (> 56)
8 Open/close disc tray (> 15)
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The unit’s display
EXT-L COPY
SD USB
HDDSDVD
PLAY
1 SD card slot indicator
6 Remote control signal indicator
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
7 Main display section indicator
Current time/playback counter, various messages
8 Playback indicator
9 USB port indicator
This indicator lights up when a USB memory is inserted.
: Timer recording indicator
This indicator lights up when an SD card is inserted.
2 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
3 Copying indicator
4 Disc indicator
This indicator lights up when a disc is inserted.
5 Drive (HDD, DVD or SD) indicator
This indicator lights up when the timer recording standby is
activated.
Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU display
You can access the main function quickly and easily.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Play all Video (> 21)
≥The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
Play Video ( AVCHD ) (> 39)
FUNCTION MENU
High Definition
Play all Video
Play Pictures ( JPEG ) (> 60)
Play Music (> 67)
TV Guide (> 23)
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music
TV Guide
Copy
DVD-RAM
Play Video
Playlists
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
DVD Management
View
Others
Copy (> 25)
DVD
SD
SD Card
USB
Select for playback of disc and formatting of disc etc.
View (> 20)
≥“View” is displayed when this unit is connected with the TV that
supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (> 72)
OK
RETURN
Others
Timer Recording (> 33)
Ext Link Standby (> 55)
Flexible Recording via AV input (> 57)
DV Automatic Recording (> 57)
Network (> 74)
OK
OK
Setup (> 83)
Select an item.
Press [OK].
≥You can access the main functions via either the above
operations or repetition of the above operations.
DVD
SD Card
USB
Select an operation that can be executed with media such as
discs, SD cards, or USB devices.
≥There are operations that cannot be performed when recording or
when there is no media inserted. Those items are disabled for
selection in such cases.
RQT9439
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.
∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
∫ Setup precautions
∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor, etc.
gets inside the unit.
∫ While operating
≥Do not place on anything that
generates heat like a video cassette
recorder, etc.
≥Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
≥Place in an area where condensation
does not occur. Condensation is a
phenomenon where moisture forms on a
cold surface when there is an extreme
≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD
may become damaged.)
DO NOT
≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
This unit
VCR
∫ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for
a short time.)
change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal
damage to the unit.
≥Conditions where condensation may occur
–When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or when
subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly
impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is
subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of the
HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.
–When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
–During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
Unit care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
DO NOT
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the Lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
[Note]
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
Lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is
empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
RQT9439
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card)
Inserting discs
Disc and card care
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
∫ How to hold a disc or card
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.
∫ Cartridge disc
Insert label-up.
DO
DO NOT
Insert label-up with the
arrow facing in.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
Insert fully.
DO
DO NOT
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
≥When using 8 cm disc, remove the disc from the cartridge.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.
∫ Handling precautions
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and unbalanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other
strange things.
Inserting, removing the USB memory
Inserting the USB memory
When the USB indicator (“USB”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the
USB memory is being read from. Do not turn off the unit or remove
the USB memory. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of
the USB memory’s contents.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
–Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
≥Before inserting any USB memory to this
unit, ensure that the data stored therein
has been backed up.
≥Check the orientation of the USB
connector and insert it straight in.
–Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
≥Insert an USB device while the unit is
stopped, so the “USB” screen is
displayed. Select an item and press [OK]
to switch to the USB-related operations (> 58, 59).
–Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart
shapes.
DO NOT
≥Do not place in the following areas:
–In direct sunlight.
–In very dusty or humid areas.
–Near a heater.
–Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
Removing the USB memory
≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
be damaged.
–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
when you are not using them.
Inserting, removing the SD card
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the
card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or
remove the card. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the
card’s contents.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no
compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a
problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no
responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent
damage caused by such loss.
≥Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
Inserting the card
Press on the centre of
If you are using a
Examples of causes of such losses are
the card until it clicks
miniSD card, a
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD
Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another
company.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this
unit.
into place.
miniSDHC card, a
microSD card or a
microSDHC card, insert miniSD
it into the adaptor that
e.g.,
≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer
disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this
unit.
comes with the card.
Insert and remove this
adaptor from the unit.
ADAPTER
Insert the card label up with the cut-off corner on the right.
Removing the card
1 Press on the centre of the card.
2 Pull it straight out.
RQT9439
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP
1
Inserting the CAM (Conditional Access Module) and Smart Card
You need a Conditional Access Module together with a valid Smart Card and a subscription with the corresponding broadcaster.
1 Insert the certified Smart Card into the commercially available CAM (Conditional Access Module).
2 Insert the CAM into the CI (Common Interface) slot of this unit.
TV service encryption is automatically cancelled and the service can be viewed or recorded.
≥You can insert one or two different CAMs with Smart Cards into this unit.
However, it will not operate properly when two CI Plus compatible CAMs are simultaneously inserted.
CI (Common Interface) slot
This unit’s rear panel
CAM (Conditional Access Module)
1
2
COMMON INTERFACE
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
13V/18V
LNB
LNB
IN
Smart Card
400mA max.
IN
1
2
AC IN
Adjust the position marks.
Label facing upwards
∫ PIN query
When you turn the unit on after inserting the card, depending on the card provider, a PIN may be demanded.
Enter the 4-digit code with the numbered buttons.
[Note]
≥Be sure to insert the CAM horizontally into the slot.
≥Do not insert the CAM and Smart Card upside down.
≥For more details, see the manual of the CAM and Smart Card, or consult the dealer.
≥The Common Interface supports the modules according to DVB Specification and CI Plus Specification.
≥Unplug the AC mains lead before you insert or remove the CAM with Smart Card. Remove it slowly.
RQT9439
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 2 Connection
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Refer to “Additional connections” (> 96) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.
≥Refer to “Network connection” (> 99) for connection network.
≥Confirm connections not listed below with your dealer.
Satellite cable
≥Connect both satellite terminals (LNB IN 1 and LNB IN 2) to the satellite dish when you want to record 2 programmes simultaneously or view
TV during recording.
≥Connect LNB IN 1 terminal to the satellite dish when you use only one terminal. (You cannot view if you connect only LNB IN 2 terminal.) In
this case, you cannot record 2 programmes simultaneously or view TV during recording.
≥Supply power from another device when you use 2 or more devices to receive satellite broadcast, because this unit does not supply power
when it is turned in standby.
Television’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
AV
LNB IN
HDMI IN
HDMI cable
(> below)
Satellite cable
AC mains lead
4
≥Connect the satellite
cable if your television
has a built-in digital
satellite tuner. (It is not
possible to connect the
satellite cable directly to
this unit.)
(included)
Connect only after
all other
connections are
complete.
5
Common Interface (CI) slot
In order to view or record TV
services, refer to “STEP 1 Inserting
the CAM (Conditional Access
Module) and Smart Card” (> 16).
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
(> below)
6
Cooling fan
1
2
VIDEO
Y
AV1
(TV)
L
R
P
B
R
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
COMMON INTERFACE
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
P
13V/18V
400mA max.
AV2
(EXT)
LNB
IN 1
LNB
IN 2
AC IN
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
OPTICAL
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
This unit’s rear panel
Satellite cable
(> above)
[Required^setting]
≥Set “HDMI Video Mode” and “HDMI Audio
Output” to “On” (> 89).
(The default setting is “On”.)
1
2
3
Satellite dish
≥Even when your television does not have an HDMI input terminal, you still can view only with the 21-pin Scart cable connection (5) (However,
functions such as the “HDAVI ControlTM” function cannot be used.)
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
[approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)]
Using a HDMI cable
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM) technology (> 114, 115).
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥When outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI Cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.
[> 72, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)]
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.
[Note]
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 114) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
Using a 21-pin Scart cable
You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (> 72).
You can enjoy high-quality viewing [standard definition (SD) quality] by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television (> 115).
≥Set “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 90)
If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected with a Panasonic TV (VIERA), the following functions are available.
≥Direct TV Recording (> 72)
≥Pause Live TV programme (> 73)
RQT9439
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 3 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
6 Press [2, 1] to select the Search
Mode.
TV
≥All Channels:
Search for all channels.
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
≥Free Channels:
Search for free channels only.
PAGE
CH
abc
2
def
3
1
ghi
jkl
mno
4
7
5
6
7 Press [OK].
p
w
tuv
xyz
qrs
8
0
9
Auto Setup starts.
PROG/CHECK
INPUT
DEL
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Auto Setup
Satellite
Checking LNB1
Progress
0%
100%
This will take up to 40 minutes.
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
LNB in 1
Satellite
Checking...
LNB in 2
Checking...
STATUS
OPTION
EXIT
I
Press RETURN to skip Satellite installation
Searching Satellite
FUNCTION
MENU
RETURN
OK
,,,
Searching Satellite # Searching Channels
OK
RETURN
≥These operations may take some time.
RETURN
CREATE
After Auto Setup is complete, the time information can be
obtained and Power Save setting screen appears.
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
TEXT
STTL
AUDIO DISPLAY
8 Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off”
and press [OK].
Power Save
On
Off
On: Minimises standby power consumption,
disables Quick Start function. Unit’s Display
is set to "Automatic".
Off: Enables Quick Start function.
1 Turn on the television and select the
OK
RETURN
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
≥On:
It will go into the Power Save mode when the power is
turned off.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
≥Off:
Language setting screen appears on the television.
It is possible to start quickly from standby mode.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the language
The features of the power save function when the unit is in
standby mode are as follows.
and press [OK].
On§1
Off§2
Country setting screen appears on the television.
Power Save
Power
Approx. 0.3 W
Approx. 7 W
4 Press [3, 4] to select the country and
consumption
Quick§3
press [OK].
Start up time
Not Quick
Dish Setup screen appears on the television.
§1
“Unit’s Display” is fixed to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.
(> 88)
“Unit’s Display” is changed to “Bright” in the Setup menu.
It is possible to startup and start recording within several
seconds.
5 Press [3, 4] to select the number of
§2
§3
cables to connect and press [OK].
(> 22, About 2 programmes recorded simultaneously)
– Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it
may take time to display the screen.
≥Two cables ( Same signal ):
Select this item when connecting two cables outputting
same signal to both LNB IN 1 and LNB IN 2.
After Power Save setting is complete, TV aspect setting
screen appears.
≥One cable:
Select this item when connecting only one cable to
LNB IN 1.
Search Mode screen appears on the television.
RQT9439
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect
∫ If the clock setting menu appears (> 91, Clock)
and press [OK].
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly (> 83, Channel List)
TV Aspect
16:9 WIDE TV
16:9
∫ To restart set up (> 83, Auto Setup)
4:3 TV
Pan & Scan
Letterbox
OK
RETURN
≥16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen
television
≥Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture.
This setting may not work and the pictures
may be shown in the letterbox style
depending on the content.
≥Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style.
When television picture appears, set up is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
STEP 4 Setting the CI or CI Plus (Common Interface)
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Common Interface” and press [OK].
Connection
TV Aspect
16:9
4:3
Aspect for 4:3 Video
TV System
PAL
HDMI Connection
Component Resolution
AV1 Output
576i/480i
Video
AV2 Settings
Common Interface
Access
OK
RETURN
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Slot 1:” or “Slot 2:” and press [OK].
The features that appear on screen are dependent on the contents of the inserted CAM and Smart Card.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
≥On-screen instructions may not correspond to the remote control buttons.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
≥For more information about TV service, please contact your service provider.
[Note]
≥Other settings on the card, e.g. changing the password, can be adjusted in the Setup menu. (> 90)
≥Depending on the card, in some cases its use together with this unit may be limited or not possible.
RQT9439
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Watching digital broadcasts
Basic
operations
Refer to “Advanced watching digital broadcasts”
(> 26).
∫ Select the station from Channel List
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels you watch often. (> 83, Favourites Edit)
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)
1 Press [OK].
TV
Channel List is displayed.
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
All DVB Channels
1 ZDF
Sorting 1 2 3...
PAGE
CH
2 3 sat
3 KiKa
abc
2
jkl
5
def
3
1
CH
4
5
6
ZDFinfok
ZDFdokuk
ZDFtheat
Numbered
buttons
ghi
mno
4
7
6
p
w
7 DKULTUR
Select
tuv
xyz
qrs
8
0
9
PROG/CHECK
INPUT
DEL
SELECT
INPUT SELECT
RETURN
Category
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
123/ABC
≥Press the “Red” button to select the “Category”.
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
≥Press the “Blue” button to change the sorting mode.
STOP
STATUS
OPTION
2 Press [3, 4] to select the station and press
EXIT
I
GUIDE
[OK].
OK
,,,
∫ Select the programme to view using the TV
OK
RETURN
Guide
RETURN
CREATE
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels you watch often. (> 83, Favourites Edit)
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
“Red”
“Blue”
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)
1 Press [GUIDE].
This unit has the tuner which allows it to directly receive and record
digital satellite channels.
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
All Types
WED, 27.05.2009
KiKa
Landscape
All DVB Channels
3
23:00-23:45 Factory Tour
Time: 23:00
23:30
0:00
0:30
1:00
1 Turn on the television and select the
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ZDF
sat
Hunter. \*Episode 5\*
Bruder
3
Frankfurt
Valley
News
KiKa
Factory Tour
Unser Auto
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
ZDFinfok
ZDFdokuk
ZDFtheat
DKULTUR
Wandern im Wald
Ökosystem Savanne
Planète insolite
Sonderberichte
PLATINUM/MARS
Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden
Hier ist die Familie
Select Channel
OK
Page Up
Info
OPTION
GUIDE
Prog. Type
CH
Page Down
Change display mode
Select Programme
RETURN
-24 hours
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
+24 hours
Category
3 Press [INPUT SELECT] a few times
≥Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.
To select channel in Category.
1 Press the “Blue” button to display the list of category.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired item and press [OK].
and select “TV”.
Input Selection
Operations in the TV Guide system (> 36)
AV1
AV2
AV3
DV
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme to
view and press [OK].
TV
Menu
Select
EXIT
Change
View
RETURN
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
≥It will switch when the display disappears.
(It will switch faster by pressing [OK])
4 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
≥This is displayed only when the programme currently
broadcasting is selected.
Everytime you change the station, digital channel information
appears automatically.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “View” and press [OK].
The length of time the digital channel information is displayed
can be changed. (> 88, On-Screen Messages)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Unit’s display;
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
15:
115:
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]
[0] > [0] > [1] > [5]
[0] > [1] > [1] > [5]
1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]
RQT9439
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DVD-Video/Playing recorded video contents
Refer to “Advanced playback” (> 37) for detail
information.
Playing recorded video contents
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›]
You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them.
TV
VOL
Following screen is displayed when recordable disc is inserted.
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE SELECT
e.g.,
PAGE
CH
DVD-RAM
abc
2
def
3
1
Play Video
Numbered
buttons
ghi
jkl
mno
4
7
5
6
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy
p
w
tuv
xyz
qrs
8
0
9
PROG/CHECK
INPUT
DVD-RAM is inserted.
DEL
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
OK
,
RETURN
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
Press [3, 4] to select “Play Video” and press [OK].
It will go to step 3 (> below).
STATUS
I
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
OK
HDD or DVD drive.
,,,
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
OK
OPTION
RETURN
OPTION
CREATE
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
e.g., [HDD]
Preparation
(Grouped Titles)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All
HDD
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
Not Viewed
Movie
Social/Economi
Sports Video (AVCHD)
ZDF
Helicopter Informationen
29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46 Rec Time0:01(DR)
20.03(Thu) Berge und Flüsse
≥Turn on this unit.
ZDF
KiKa
ZDFdokuk
sat
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
3
Playing DVD-Video
KiKa
DV
PLAY
Page 001/002
RETURN
OPTION
Previous
Edit Title
Next
Select
Delete Title
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
≥Play starts from the point specified by the disc.
press [OK].
2
When a menu screen appears on the television
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item
and press [OK].
Regarding DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 39)
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
5
1
4
2
3
≥Some items can also be selected using the numbered
buttons.
≥If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the
menu screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].
To display Top Menu
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” and press [OK].
≥You can also press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to return to the menu
screen.
RQT9439
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording television programmes [HDD]
Refer to “Advanced recording” (> 28–31) for detail
information.
∫ About 2 programmes recorded simultaneously
There are the following differences during recording depending on
the number of antenna cables connected (> 17).
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
TV
Connection
Broadcast
being
recorded
Second broadcast being
recorded or viewed during
recording
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
PAGE
CH
Unencrypted
broadcast
Encrypted
broadcast§
abc
def
1
4
7
DEL
2
3
CH
Numbered
buttons
ghi
jkl
5
mno
6
Two cables
( Same signal )
Unencrypted
broadcast
≤
≤
–
≤
p
w
xyz
qrs
tuv
8
0
9
Encrypted
broadcast§
–
PROG/CHECK
INPUT
INPUT SELECT
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
One cable
Unencrypted
broadcast
–
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
Encrypted
broadcast§
–
–
STATUS
OPTION
I
§
To view or record an encrypted broadcast, a CAM (Conditional
Access Module) with Smart Card valid for the broadcast is
required.
OK
,,,
OK
RETURN
∫ To record 2 programmes simultaneously (> 32)
CREATE
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
When recording digital broadcast with subtitles, multiple
audio or Teletext
REC
If a programme to record has subtitle, multiple audio or Teletext, all
subtitles, multiple audio and Teletext are recorded.
It can be switched while playing back the title.
This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
1 Press [INPUT SELECT] a few times
and select “TV” and press [OK].
During recording
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the
recording time.
2 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
≥To select with the numbered buttons. (> 20)
≥To select the station from channel List. (> 20)
^" Counter (cancel)
,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
≥The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is
reached.
≥This does not work during timer recordings (> 23, 33) or while
using Flexible Recording via AV input (> 57).
3 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
“REC1” or “REC2” will light
To cancel
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
REC1
Unit’s display
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD. Data
will not be overwritten.
To stop recording
≥When [¥ REC] is pressed while a drive other than the HDD
is selected, it will automatically switch to HDD and start the
recording.
Press [∫].
∫ Refer to “Operation during Recording” (> 32)
for detail information.
4
To stop recording
Press [∫].
If the following screen appears
Stop Recording
Recording [ ZDF 1 ]
Recording of this programme is in progress.
To stop recording, select "Yes" or press STOP.
Stop this recording ?
Yes
No
OK
RETURN
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
∫ To pause recording
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
RQT9439
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer recording
Timer Recording
HDD 30:24 DR
SAT 10.01 2009 19:10
Channel
3
Day/Date
SAT 10.01 23:10 23:40 HDD
Start Stop Drive Mode
DR
TV
[Prog.Name]
Factory Tour
Input Name
VOL
CH
DRIVE
KiKa
SELECT
AV
Prog.Type: Movie
1998, Deutschland
Direktor “N Schmitt”
PAGE
CH
abc
def
1
4
7
2
3
OK
Category/
AV
Date/
Weekly
RETURN
ghi
jkl
5
mno
6
9
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (> 33, step 3).
≥In order to make the timer recording work successfully, using
the TV Guide system, the start recording time and finish
recording time can be set to a margin of up to 10 minutes.
(> 86, Start Recording Time, Finish Recording Time)
p
w
xyz
qrs
tuv
8
0
PROG/CHECK
INPUT
DEL
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
STATUS
3 Press [OK].
EXIT
I
GUIDE
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon (red) is
displayed.
OK
All Types
,,,
All DVB Channels
OK
OPTION
RETURN
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
0:00
0:30
1:00
Les enfants, j’a
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
Timer icon (red)
News
Unser Auto
Timer Recording using the TV Guide
system
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
[HDD]
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
TV Guide system provides programme information only from the
digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV
programme magazine.
∫ To cancel a timer recording on the TV Guide
screen
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels you watch often. (> 83, Favourites Edit)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in
the TV Guide and press [OK].
≥You can enter up to 64 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
(“F” in the TV Guide disappears.)
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
∫ To modify the timer recording on the TV Guide
screen
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 91).
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in
[Note]
the TV Guide and press [OPTION].
≥TV Guide does not work if the clock is not set correctly.
≥If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (> 89), the TV Guide
system cannot be used.
≥The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the
satellite input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via
externally connected Set Top Box is not possible.
≥To record an encrypted broadcast, a CAM (Conditional Access
Module) with Smart Card valid for the broadcast is required.
Menu
View
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Timer Rec Edit” and
press [OK].
(> 33, step 3)
1 Press [GUIDE].
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
WED, 27.05.2009
Landscape
All Types
All DVB Channels
∫ When the TV Guide displays the empty TV Guide
3
KiKa
23:00-23:45 Factory Tour
Time: 23:00
23:30
Hunter. \*Episode 5\*
0:00
0:30
1:00
list
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ZDF
sat
Bruder
3
Frankfurt
Valley
News
KiKa
Factory Tour
Unser Auto
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
ZDFinfok
ZDFdokuk
ZDFtheat
DKULTUR
Wandern im Wald
Ökosystem Savanne
Planète insolite
WED, 27.05.2009
KiKa
Landscape
All Types
0:00
All DVB Channels
Sonderberichte
3
PLATINUM/MARS
Hier ist die Familie
23:00-23:45 Factory Tour
Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden
Time: 23:00
23:30
0:30 1:00
Select Channel
OK
Page Up
1
2
ZDF
sat
Info
OPTION
GUIDE
Prog. Type
CH
The empty field
Page Down
Change display mode
Select Programme
RETURN
-24 hours
3
Frankfurt
Valley
News
+24 hours
Category
≥Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.
Set the timer recording manually (> 33).
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
∫ Manually programming timer recording (> 33)
∫ To set the daily or weekly timer recording (> 33)
∫ To release the unit from timer recording standby
(> 34)
∫ To cancel recording when timer recording has
already begun (> 34)
∫ About 2 programmes recorded simultaneously
(> 22)
∫ Notes on timer recording (> 35)
future programme and press [OK].
≥Following screen is displayed when the programme
currently broadcasting is selected.
Menu
View
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
RQT9439
Press [3, 4] to select “Timer Rec Set” and press [OK].
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting titles
1
While stopped
TV
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
VOL
CH
DRIVE
(Grouped Titles)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
SELECT
AV
All
Not Viewed
Movie
Social/Economi
Sports Video (AVCHD)
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
ZDF
Helicopter Informationen
29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46 Rec Time0:01(DR)
20.03(Thu) Berge und Flüsse
ZDF
KiKa
ZDFdokuk
sat
abc
def
1
4
7
DEL
2
3
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
3
ghi
jkl
5
mno
6
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
KiKa
p
w
DV
xyz
qrs
tuv
8
0
9
PLAY
Page 001/002
RETURN
OPTION
Previous
Edit Title
Next
PROG/CHECK
INPUT
Select
Delete Title
DEL
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
,
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
press the “Red” button.
STATUS
OPTION
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
items you wish to delete.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
EXIT
I
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
OK
,,,
RETURN
OK
You can confirm the titles that you have selected using the
option menu. (> 45, Properties)
RETURN
CREATE
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
“Red”
“Blue”
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
3 Press the “Blue” button.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
≥A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain
before proceeding.
The title is deleted.
≥Title that is currently recording cannot be deleted.
≥Titles on the disc cannot be deleted in the following cases:
–While recording to disc
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
–While high speed copying
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (> 80, Setting the protection).
Deleting during play
∫ Available disc space after deleting
1
While playing
Press [DEL].
≥[HDD] [RAM] The space deleted becomes available for recording.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles
press [OK].
The title is deleted.
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
Title
Title
......
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted.
Available disc space does
not increase even after
deleting
Available disc space
increases after deleting
Last title
recorded
Available
Title
Title
Title
......
disc space
Later recorded
titles
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
......
Deleted
This space become available for recording after all the later
recorded titles are deleted.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even
after the contents are deleted.
RQT9439
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
Copy
TV
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
DRIVE
(
0% )
Size:
0MB
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Title
HDD DVD
VOL
CH
New item (Total=0)
SELECT
AV
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
PAGE
CH
3 Create List
0
abc
def
1
4
7
2
3
Start Copying
OK
Page 01/01
ghi
jkl
mno
5
8
0
6
Create copy list.
OPTION
RETURN
p
w
xyz
qrs
tuv
9
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press the “Red” button.
PROG/CHECK
INPUT
DEL
SELECT
Create List Grouped Titles
HDD
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Date
25.05
01.01 AV2
Channel Time
12:36
Title Name
Soccer Digest
Titles
,
2
1
1:35
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
Time
Rec time
12:36
0:52(SP)
STATUS
I
Page 001/001
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Select
OK
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
,,,
OPTION
RETURN
OK
RETURN
CREATE
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
“Red”
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
≥Titles indicated with “
speed mode.
≥To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
” can not be copied in high
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)
≥About copyright protected titles (> 30, 49)
4 Press [OK].
1 Insert a disc.
5 Press [2] to confirm.
e.g.,
6 Set other settings.
DVD-RAM
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Other Settings” and press [1].
Play Video
“Subtitles”
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy
(Only when copying titles in DR mode and the recording mode
other than High Speed is selected)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Subtitles” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Automatic” or “Off” and press [OK].
≥If “Automatic” is selected
DVD-RAM is inserted.
OK
RETURN
Subtitle in the source titles will be copied.
≥If “Off” is selected
Subtitle in the source titles will not be copied.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
“Finalise” or “Create Top Menu”
press [OK].
([HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] only)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” or “Create Top Menu” and
press [OK].
≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
3 Set the copy direction.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
≥If “On” is selected
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] After finalising, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other
DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or
edit.
–[+RW] Create the Top Menu. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before
playing a +RW disc on other equipment.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD” and press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy
Cancel All
Source
HDD
DVD
1 Copy Direction
HDD DVD
Destination
2 Copy Mode
4 Press [2] to confirm.
VIDEO High Speed
Information of the copy destination
-
-
DVD-RAM
Copy restricted titles can be
3 Create List
0
copied on to disc
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Start Copying
Copying” and press [OK].
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
4 Set the recording mode.
press [OK] to start copying.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK].
6 Press [2] to confirm.
To return to the previous screen in step 1 to 7
Press [RETURN ].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising or creating Top Menu)
5 Register titles for copy.
∫ Copying list icons and functions (> 53)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
[Note]
≥Titles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be registered
simultaneously.
≥Titles recorded using a different encoding system (PAL or NTSC)
from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be
copied.
RQT9439
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced watching digital broadcasts
There are various services included in the digital broadcasts
depending on the programme. You can confirm or set these services
with the following operations.
To show subtitle
Press [STTL ].
≥Press again to hide the subtitle.
Digital channel information
While stopped
Switching audio of the TV broadcast
Press [AUDIO].
Press [STATUS ].
≥Audio will switch according to the contents of the programme every
time it is pressed.
12:55
1 ZDF
All DVB Channels
Bruder
0:50 - 2:30
Change category
For info press
e.g.,
Now
MULTI
/
Encrypted Dolby D
HD
D
HD
D
HDD
41:03 DR
41:03 DR
41:03 DR
1
ZDF
1
ZDF
1
ZDF
STEREO LR
STEREO L
STEREO R
1 Channel and Station Name
2 Programme name and Broadcast time
3 Current category
deu
(Dolby Digital)
deu
(Dolby Digital)
deu
(Dolby Digital)
4 Change the category
5 Encrypted broadcast
6 Audio format (> below)
7 Subtitle (> right)
8 Teletext (> 27)
9 Multiple audio/Sub Channel (> right)
H
D
D
H
D
D
HDD
41:03 DR
41:03 DR
41:03 DR
1
1
1
ZDF
ZDF
ZDF
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Press [2, 1].
STEREO R
deu (MPEG)
STEREO L
deu (MPEG)
STEREO LR
deu (MPEG)
To show detailed information about the programme
Press [STATUS ] again.
[Note]
To hide the information screen
You can not change the audio channel (L, R) when “Rec for High
Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (> 86)
Press [STATUS ] once or twice.
[Note]
You can also select the other channel by pressing [3, 4] and [OK].
when the information screen is displayed.
To select content in the digital
broadcast
∫ Audio format of the programme
When a programme of a digital broadcast includes audio signals,
subtitle and sub channel, you can use the following operations to
select signals.
There are programmes that use Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital, or
MPEG audio formats with the digital broadcasting. You can enjoy
these audio format programmes in high quality by connecting to an
amplifier.
1 Press [OPTION].
To set the output of the audio
Set either “Bitstream” or “PCM” for “Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Plus”,
“DTS” or “MPEG” in the “Digital Audio Output” (> 87).
2 Press [3, 4] to select the
“Multi Audio”, “Sub Channel” or
“Subtitle Language” and press [OK].
Control Panel
FUNCTION MENU
Aspect
Play Menu
Multi Audio
Sub Channel
Subtitle Language
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
≥Multi Audio can also be selected with the [AUDIO] button.
(> 26)
3 Press [2, 1] to select the setting.
≥When there is only one setting available, you cannot select
between items.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9439
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To show Teletext
You can enjoy teletext broadcasting, including news, weather
forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the
broadcasters.
When “
” appears in digital channel information (> 26)
1 Press [TEXT ].
e.g.,
Sub page number
<<01 02 03 04 05 06 07
>>
Current
page
P100
number
TELETEXT
INFORMATION
Colour bar
2 Press [3, 4], the numbered buttons,
or the colour buttons to select the
page.
Follow the instruction on the screen to select the page.
To show the sub page
(only when there are sub pages)
Press [2, 1].
∫ Change the Teletext mode
“Teletext” of the Setup menu can be changed to following modes.
(> 88)
≥FLOF (FASTEXT) mode
Four differently coloured subjects are situated at the bottom of
the screen. To access more information about one of these
subjects, press the appropriately coloured button. This facility
enables fast access to information on the subjects shown.
≥TOP mode (in case of TOP text broadcasting)
TOP is a particular improvement of the standard teletext service
that results in an easier search and effective guide.
–Fast overview of the teletext information available
–Easy to use step-by-step selection of the topical subject
–Page status information at the bottom of the screen
≥List mode
Four differently coloured page numbers are situated at the
bottom of the screen. Each of these numbers can be altered
and stored in this unit.
To store frequently viewed page (List mode only)
During the page is displayed
1 Press the colour button of the colour to store.
2 Press and hold [OK].
e.g.,
P100
Broadcast
101
200
400
888
The number changes to white.
To change stored pages (List mode only)
1 Press the colour button of the colour to change.
2 Enter the new page number with the numbered buttons.
3 Press and hold [OK].
To exit the teletext screen
Press [TEXT ].
[Note]
The teletext function depends on respective stations.
RQT9439
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced recording
Title
Recording
Recording method and disc
Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods and discs.
[-R]
[-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+RW]
[-R]DL]
[+R]DL]
Recording method
[HDD]
[RAM]
Recording by using [¥ REC] button
DR
DR
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Using this unit’s
tuner
Timer Recording
Recording by using [¥ REC] button XP, SP, LP, EP
XP, SP, LP,
Timer Recording
EP,FR
–
–
–
–
From External
equipment
Flexible Recording via AV input
DV Automatic Recording
FR
FR
FR
FR
–
–
–
XP, SP, LP, EP XP, SP, LP, EP XP, SP, LP, EP XP, SP, LP, EP
Linked Timer recording (Ext Link)
XP, SP, LP, EP
–
–
–
∫ Maximum number of titles that can be recorded
[HDD]: 999 titles (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]: 99 titles on one disc.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]: 49 titles on one disc.
Recording modes and recording contents
Picture quality or audio that can be recorded differ depending on the recording mode.
≥This also explains about copying or DR File Conversion (> 46).
Recording mode
DR
HG, HX, HE, HL
XP, SP, LP, EP
FR (> below)
Quality that can
be recorded
Quality same as
broadcasted
(HD quality and SD quality)
Quality produced by
conversion§1 of broadcast
data (HD quality and SD
quality)
SD quality only
Record only one audio§2
Multiple audio
Subtitles
Record all multiple audio
Can be recorded
Can be recorded§3
The subtitles cannot be switched on or off during playback.
Teletext
Can be recorded
Can be recorded [Copy Title Playing (> 51) only]
You will not be able to switch between display/non-display or execute Teletext operations
in the recorded content.
Sub Channel
Cannot be recorded in timer recording
Surround audio
Surround audio as the
broadcast
Surround Audio produced
Stereo audio
by conversion of broadcast
audio format§4
§1
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 encoding
Before copying or DR File Conversion, select the audio to record.
§2
–“Copy” or “DR File Conversion”: Select the audio with “Preferred Language” in the Setup menu (> 85).
–“Copy Title Playing”: Select the audio with “Multi Audio” in the Disc menu (> 77).
Before copying or DR File Conversion, select the subtitle to record.
§3
–“Copy” or “DR File Conversion”: Select the subtitle with “Preferred Language” in the Setup menu (> 85).
–“Copy Title Playing”:
Subtitle displayed during playback are recorded.
Press [STTL ] to display the subtitle.
Select the subtitle with “Subtitles” in the Disc menu (> 77)
If the audio sampling frequency is not 48 kHz, surround audio is mixed and recorded in front LR channels. Audio will be output from two front
speakers only, even if you play it on 5.1 ch speaker connection.
§4
∫ FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or recording from external equipment.
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with
the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
RQT9439
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ Recording modes and approximate recording times
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
Recording Mode
[HDD]
[RAM]
Double-sided§2
[-R]
[-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[-R]DL]
[+R]DL]
(8.5 GB)
(250 GB)
Single-sided
(4.7 GB)
(9.4 GB)
[+RW]
(4.7 GB)
DR§1
37 hours
30 min
–
–
–
–
–
–
(High Definition (HD) quality:
estimated bit rate is 14 Mbps)
DR§1
105 hours
–
–
(Standard Definition (SD) quality:
estimated bit rate is 5 Mbps)
HG
HX
HE
HL
XP
40 hours
60 hours
90 hours
120 hours
55 hours
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1 hour
2 hours
1 hour
1 hour
45 min.
SP
110 hours
221 hours
2 hours
4 hours
4 hours
8 hours
16 hours
2 hours
4 hours
3 hours
35 min.
LP
7 hours
10 min.
EP§3
441 hours
8 hours
8 hours
14 hours
20 min.
(331 hours§4
)
(6 hours§
)
(12 hours§
)
(6 hours§
)
4
4
4
(10 hours
45 min.§4
)
§1
Recording time of DR mode may vary depending on bit rate of broadcasting.
It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW
§2
§3
discs.
§4
When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “6 hours” in the Setup menu (> 86).
The sound quality is better when using “6 hours” than when using “8 hours”.
≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “8 hours” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.
Use “6 hours” mode if playback may be on other equipment.
∫ Regarding recording time remaining
DR mode recording
Remaining time in the DR mode is calculated with a bit rate of approx. 14 Mbps. But the bit rate differs depending on the broadcast, so the
displayed remaining time might be different from the actual remaining time.
Other recording modes (title conversion or from external input)
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording.
RQT9439
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced recording
2 programmes simultaneous recording
This function can only be used when two satellite cables are connected to the unit (> 17) and “Two cables ( Same signal )” has been
selected in Auto Setup (> 18, 83).
Possible combination for 2 programmes simultaneous recording
To record both programmes
to the HDD
and
HDD
HDD
Digital broadcast
(DR mode)
Digital broadcast
or
external input
To perform 2 programmes simultaneous recording, 1 programme out of the 2 needs to be recorded to the
HDD in “DR” mode.
During the recording of an encrypted broadcast, you cannot view or record another encrypted broadcast.
[Note]
≥2 programmes simultaneous recording is not possible in following conditions:
–When “One cable” has been selected in Auto Setup (> 18, 83).
–When a single satellite cable is connected to the unit (> 17)
–2 programmes from the external input
–While recording from DV input, or executing “Flexible Recording via AV input”
–While high speed copying
–2 programmes on same channel cannot be recorded simultaneously by pressing [¥ REC].
Types of recording data for copyright protected titles
Titles recorded using CI Plus are copyright protected.
Copying not restricted
It can be copied for indefinite generations.
≥There may be a limitation with the types of disc that can be copied to. (> 49)
One generation copy is There are limitations with the types of disc that can be copied to, and the number of copies. (> 49)
permitted
≥Original data are deleted when the recording mode is converted. (> 46)
Copying is prohibited
Copy is not possible.
≥You will not be able to playback after a specific period has passed following recording.
≥Playback limitation can be confirmed with Properties. (> 45)
≥Editing, other than Delete and Properties, is not possible. (> 44)
≥Playback/record is not possible when "Automatic" in "Clock" is set to "Off". (> 91)
RQT9439
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important notes for recording
≥When the “Rec for High Speed Copy” of the Setup menu is “On”
–Record from external equipment.
–Copy from the finalised disc (DVD-Video) to the HDD
≥When recording to [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
16:9 image such as
wide broadcasting
≥When converting the recording mode from DR mode to HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP or FR modes
It will be recorded in accordance to the setting of “Aspect for Recording” (> 86) in the Setup menu.
≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”, recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
–When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.
Speed to copy the title recorded on the HDD to a disc differs depending on the recording mode of the title and the
disc to copy.
High Speed Copy
Title in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR modes
[RAM] Title can be copied at high speed.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Title can be copied at high speed if “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On” before the programme is recorded
to HDD from external input. (The default setting is “On”. > 86)
But in the following cases, high speed mode does not work.
–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode
–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
“DR File Conversion” is a function that converts the titles in DR mode to other recording modes.
In general, Data size of a title will be smaller than the original title after conversion.
You can save HDD capacity by deleting the original title after conversion.
DR File Conversion
Title DR
Available disc space
Converting to other mode
Available disc space
Deleting the original data
Available disc space
Title DR
Title HL
Title HL
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The disc must be finalised (> 82).
Playing the disc on
other players
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them
as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or copy.§
§
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW. (> 81)
Record to DVD-R, etc.
Play on other DVD equipment
CG
C
H
SEAR
ENTER
V
OL
I
S
P
L
A
Y
D
M
E
NU
T
O
P
N
RETUR
ON
MENU
OFF
/I
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC
2
3
4
5
/
/
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
OPEN/CLOSE
D
C
IN
9V
OPEN
ND
ROU
S
U
R
A
T
REPE
A
.
DE
T
O
R
M
O
MONI
ODE
PICTURE
M
Finalise
[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (> 82).
To view or record an encrypted broadcast, insert the CAM (Conditional Access Module) with Smart Card valid for
the broadcast in the CI slot in the rear panel of the unit, and set the CI. (> 16, 19)
Recording an
encrypted
broadcast
≥During the recording of an encrypted broadcast, you cannot view or record another encrypted broadcast.
RQT9439
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced recording
Playing while you are recording
Operation during Recording
Chasing playback
Playback from the beginning of the title in the HDD, while the title is
being recorded to the HDD.
Check the
recording
programme
Press [STATUS ].
e.g., while 2 programmes simultaneous
recording
Simultaneous rec and play
Playback the previously recorded title while recording onto the HDD
or timer recording onto the disc.
H
DD
Recording programme
displayed on the TV screen
REC1
1
ZDF
Recording programme not
displayed on the TV screen
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
3 KiKa REC2
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
Switch the
input
Press [INPUT SELECT].
recording.
(Grouped Titles)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports Video (AVCHD)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All
HDD
Switch to
other
Press [W X CH].
≥Other operation (> 20)
Not Viewed
Movie
Social/Economi
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
ZDF
Berge und Flüsse
KiKa
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
channel§
ZDFdokuk
3
sat
ZDF
Helicopter Informationen
29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46 Rec time0:01(DR)
≥During the recording of an encrypted
broadcast, you cannot view or record another
encrypted broadcast. (> 22)
PLAY
RETURN
Page 001/001
OPTION
Select
Edit Title
Delete Title
It is necessary to display the recording
programme onto the TV screen to perform
operations such as pause.
≥If the input was switched:
Press [INPUT SELECT].
≥If the channel was switched:
Press [W X CH].
Display the
recording
programme
on the TV
screen
“[” is displayed on the recording programme.
3 Press [3, 4] to select a title and
press [OK].
≥If the drive was switched:
Press [DRIVE SELECT].
To stop play
Press [∫].
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
It is necessary to display the programme you
want to stop on the TV screen. (> above)
To stop
recording
To stop recording
After play stops
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is
called one title.
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the screen.
Press [∫].
[Note]
It is necessary to display the programme you
want to pause on the TV screen. (> above)
To pause
recording
≥“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).
≥Depending on the state of the unit, playback may not be possible.
(> 100)
Press [;].
≥Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
≥If paused while recording in DR mode, the
paused part may become a still picture for a
moment during playback of that programme.
Perform 2
Record other programme with
programmes steps 1–3 on page 22.
simultaneous
≥One of the 2 programmes needs to be digital
broadcasting recorded with DR mode.
recording§
“REC1” and “REC2” will light
REC1
REC2
Unit’s display
≥Channel switch / input switch while performing
2 programmes simultaneous recording will
switch between the 2 recording programmes.
§
This function can only be used when two satellite cables are
connected to the unit (> 17) and “Two cables ( Same signal )”
has been selected in Auto Setup (> 18, 83).
RQT9439
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced timer recording
≥Mode
Manually programming timer recording
Recording modes and recording contents (> 28)
“XP”, “SP”, “LP”, “EP”, “FR” can be selected when “Channel”
is selected in “AV input”.
Timer recording of the broadcast
Recording disc: [HDD]
Recording mode: DR
It will be fixed to DR mode if anything else is selected.
Timer recording from the external equipment connected to AV1, AV2
or AV3
≥Renew (Auto Renewal Recording) (> 34)
Recording disc: [HDD]
Recording mode: XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
≥Input Name
Press [OK]. (> 76, Entering text)
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels you watch often. (> 83, Favourites Edit)
4 Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon (red) is
displayed.
≥You can enter up to 64 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
Timer icon (red)
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
Timer Recording
Channel Name
ZDF
HDD 30:30 DR
Schedule
FRI 23.01.2009 8:59
Space
Drive/Mode
HDD
DR
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 91).
FRI 27.03
OK
Hunter.\*Episode 5\*
22:20 - 22:30
New Timer Programme
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
Check for available space on HDD, etc., when the “!” is
displayed. (> 35)
Timer Recording
Channel Name
HDD 30:30 DR
Schedule
New Timer Programme
FRI 23.01.2009 8:59
Space
Drive/Mode
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Total 0/64
DEL Delete
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Page Up
OK
RETURN
Page Down CH
Turn
Timer Off
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer
Programme” and press [OK].
∫ Timer Recording using the TV Guide system
(> 23)
∫ To release the unit from timer recording standby
(> 34)
∫ To cancel recording when timer recording has
already begun (> 34)
3 Press [2, 1] to select the items and
change the items with [3, 4].
Timer Recording
HDD 30:24 DR
SAT 10.01 2009 19:10
All DVB Channels
Category/AV
Channel
1
Day/Date
Start Stop Drive Mode
HDD DR
SAT 10.01 23:10 --
∫ About 2 programmes recorded simultaneously
(> 22)
[Prog.Name]
Input Name
ZDF
∫ Notes on timer recording (> 35)
Category/
AV
Date/
Weekly
RETURN
[Note]
≥To record an encrypted broadcast, a CAM (Conditional Access
Module) with Smart Card valid for the broadcast is required.
≥Channel
Select the channel to record.
You can press the “Red” button (Category/AV) to change
“AV input”, “All DVB Channels”, “Free Channels”, “Radio” or
“Favourites1”, etc.
You can perform this operation when you select the box of
“Channel”.
You can also select channel with the numbered buttons.
≥Day/Date
You can select current date up to one month later minus one
day. You can select “Date” or “Weekly” by pressing the
“Green” button only when “Day/Date” is selected. Titles
recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are bundled
and displayed as a “group” in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen (> 39) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.
≥Start/Stop
Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and Stop
(Finish time) in 15-minute increments.
RQT9439
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced timer recording
To release the unit from timer recording
standby
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
Auto Renewal Recording
[HDD]
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme
over the old one.
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily
recording is selected.
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
and press the “Red” button.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
≥The timer icon “F” (> 35) will change from red to grey.
≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as
even one timer icon “F” (red) remains in the timer recording
list.
and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Renew”
≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording
standby. (The timer icon “F” will change to red.)
column.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press
[OK].
[Note]
≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while playback is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
To cancel recording when timer
recording has already begun
Press [INPUT SELECT] or [W X CH] to display the programme that
you want to stop recording on the TV screen while 2 programmes
are simultaneously recording.
1 Press [∫].
e.g.,
Stop Recording
Recording [ ZDF 1 ]
Timer recording of this programme in progress.
Stop this timer recording ?
Yes
No
OK
RETURN
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
≥If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if
you have already set a weekly, daily timer recording, the
recording will start at the next scheduled time.
RQT9439
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes on timer recording
Check, change or delete a programme
≥Only 1 programme can be set to timer recording on the disc.
≥Timer recording will not be performed if the clock is not set.
≥If the “TV System” (> 89) in the Setup menu was modified to
playback a disc or a title while on timer recording standby, return
the setting to original before the recording is started.
≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing. Depending on the state of the unit, playback may stop
when recording begins.
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Timer Recording
Channel Name
KiKa
HDD
75:15 DR
FRI 27.03.2009 21:41
Schedule Drive/Mode Space
WED 27.05
22:20 - 23:45
HDD
OK
Factory Tour
ZDF
Bruder
DR
FRI 27.03
10:40 - 12:00
HDD
DR
OK
ZDFdokuk
Bowling Biographie
FRI
22:30 - 23:25
HDD
DR
-->
≥Timer recordings do not begin while copying in normal speed
mode.
24.04
HDD
DR
ZDF
FRI 27.03
21:30 - 23:30
Duell des Nachmittags
≥The timer recording starts, whether the unit is turned on or off.
When the recording starts with the unit turned on, if you should turn
the unit off the recording status is not affected.
≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, last 1 minute of earlier programme
will not be recorded unless it can perform 2 programmes
simultaneous recording.
New Timer Programme
Total 4/64
Delete
DEL
OK
Page Up
CH
Page Down
Turn
Timer Off
RETURN
Icons
Programme Programme
Not recorded
F
Red: Timer recording standby is activated.
Grey: Timer recording standby is not activated.
[
This programme is currently recording.
Part or all of the programme will not be recorded since
the programme is overlapping.
Recorded
Recorded
≥If timer recordings overlap around the same time, some
programmes will not be recorded depending on the set timer
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.
recordings. As for programmes with “ ” displayed on the timer
recording list screen, some portion or all of the programmes cannot
be recorded. Press [PROG/CHECK] to confirm. (> left)
≥It is not possible to simultaneously record multiple programmes
from encrypted broadcasts.
The programme was copy-protected so it was not
recorded.
The programme did not complete recording because of
some reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
(> 34).
The timer recording of the encrypted broadcast is
overlapping another programme.
Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation
(> 100)
OK:
Displayed if the recording can fit in the remaining space.
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display will
show until when recordings can be made (up to a
maximum of one month from the present time) based on
the time remaining on the disc.
! :
It may not be possible to record because:
≥there is not enough space left.
≥the number of possible titles has reached its maximum.
(> 28)
≥programmes are deactivated.
∫ To change a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (> 33,
step 3)
∫ To delete a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DEL].
∫ To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
[Note]
≥Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
RQT9439
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced timer recording
Operations in the TV Guide system
Selecting the programme from the desired
programme type or Category
Basic operations
This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by programme
type (e.g. Movie, Sport) or Category (e.g. TV, Radio).
Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and Portrait
view.
1
From the desired programme type
Landscape view
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
WED, 27.05.2009
KiKa
Landscape
All Types
0:00
All DVB Channels
Press the “Yellow” button to display
3
23:00-23:45 Factory Tour
the list of programme type.
Time: 23:00
23:30
Hunter. \*Episode 5\*
0:30
1:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ZDF
sat
Bruder
From the desired Category
3
Frankfurt
Valley
News
KiKa
Factory Tour
Unser Auto
ZDFinfok
ZDFdokuk
ZDFtheat
DKULTUR
Wandern im Wald
Ökosystem Savanne
Planète insolite
Press the “Blue” button to display the
list of category.
Sonderberichte
PLATINUM/MARS
Hier ist die Familie
Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden
Select Channel
OK
Page Up
Info
OPTION
GUIDE
Prog. Type
CH
Page Down
Select Programme
RETURN
-24 hours
Change display mode
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
+24 hours
Category
item.
Prog.Type
All Types
Category
All DVB Channels
All Types
All DVB Channels
Free Channels
Pay Channels
TV
Movie
Portrait view
News
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
All DVB Channels
WED, 27.05.2009
Portrait
All Types
ZDFinfok
Entertainment
Sport
KiKa
ZDFdokuk
ZDFtheat
3
sat
23:00-23:45
23:45-01:30
01:30-02:00
02:00-03:45
03:45-05:30
05:30-06:00
06:00-08:00
08:00-10:15
Factory Tour
Unser Auto
News
Radio
Children’s
Music
Favourites1
Favourites2
Favourites3
Favourites4
Healing Raum
Mythologie
News
Art/Culture
Social/Economic
Education
Lifestyle
Brot-Fabrik
Solar System
Select Programme
OK
Page Up
Info
Select Channel
OPTION
CH
Page Down
GUIDE Change display mode
RETURN
-24 hours
+24 hours
Prog. Type
Category
3 Press [OK].
To change channels Landscape view
≥A list appears with all programmes of the selected item.
Press [3, 4] to select a channel.
≥When you select the Landscape view, the unit displays
programmes in grey that do not belong to the selected
programme type.
Portrait view
Press [2, 1] to select a channel.
The TV Guide list appears for this channel.
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
e.g.,
WED, 27.05.2009
ZDFdokuk
Landscape
News
All DVB Channels
Programme type,
“News” is selected in
step 2 of Landscape
view.
To view a programme ≥Jump ahead 24 hours
5
23:50-3:00 Sonderberichte
list for another day
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
by one day.
≥Jump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
You can only jump back to the current
date. Past information cannot be viewed.
Time: 23:00
23:30
Hunter. \*Episode 5\*
0:00
0:30
1:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ZDF
sat
Bruder
3
Frankfurt
Valley
News
KiKa
Factory Tour
Unser Auto
ZDFinfok
ZDFdokuk
ZDFtheat
DKULTUR
Ökosystem Savanne
Planète insolite
Wandern im Wald
Sonderberichte
PLATINUM/MARS
Hier ist die Familie
Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden
Select Channel
OK
Page Up
CH
Info
OPTION
Page Down
Select Programme
RETURN
-24 hours
GUIDE Change display mode
Prog. Type
+24 hours
Category
When jumping, the selected time period
may deviate.
[Note]
To browse through
the TV Guide list
Press [W X CH].
The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas.
This function does not work properly unless the information which
distinguishes the programme type and profiles sent from broadcast
stations is correct.
To see programme
information
(Programmes with the
Press [STATUS
].
Additional information (programme name,
programme duration, broadcast time,
description) is available for these
programmes.
Press [3, 4] to scroll up and down.
To show other pages
symbol)
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
programme.
Press [CH W] (Previous) or [X CH] (Next).
To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have selected
the programme type or Category
Select “All Types” of the programme type or “All DVB Channels” of
the Category in step 2. (> above)
Press [STATUS
programme list.
] again to return to the
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
TV Guide data download
≥TV Guide data is downloaded automatically while the unit is turned
on.
If the unit is turned off at the specified time, the TV Guide data is
downloaded automatically. (> 91)
≥Depending on the state of the unit, data is not downloaded during
2 programmes simultaneous recording and the like.
≥You cannot download TV Guide data during recording when “One
cable” has been selected in Auto Setup (> 18, 83).
RQT9439
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced playback
Playing back
≥Refer to page 42 for playing DivX.
≥Refer to page 60 for playing still pictures.
≥Refer to page 66 for playing music.
[Note]
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (> 89).
≥A disc or title with different “TV System” (> 89) may not be able to playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording. You will be
able to playback by changing the “TV System” settings in that case, but to prevent failure of the timer recording, change back the settings before
the recording starts.
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures, sound, etc. to start.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫] when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television
screen and so on.
Operation during play
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [DVD-V] [AVCHD] DivX
≥Depending on the media, some operations may not be possible.
Press [∫].
Stop
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
Stopped position
≥[HDD] :
Stopped position for each title is memorized.
≥Discs:
Only previous stopped position is memorized.
The position is cleared if the tray is opened.
≥[AVCHD] (SD card), DivX: Only previous stopped position is memorized.
The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
Press [;].
Pause
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Press [6] or [5].
Search
≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥Audio is heard during first level search forward.
DivX: Audio is not heard during all levels search.
During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].
Skip to the title or chapter you want to play.
Skip
≥It will skip to the beginning of chapters (> 47) if the title contains chapters.
≥[HDD] It will not skip the title. But the title in the grouped titles during the “Grouped Playback” (> 40) will be
skipped.
≥DivX: Press [:] to return to the beginning of the title currently playing.
Press the numbered buttons.
Starting from a
Play starts from the selected title or chapter.
selected title
≥[AVCHD]
Input a 3-digit number
e.g.,
[DVD-V] [AVCHD]
5: [0] > [0] > [5]
15: [0] > [1] > [5]
≥[DVD-V]
Input a 2-digit number
e.g.,
5: [0] > [5]
15: [1] > [5]
≥While stopped (the screen on the right is displayed on the television), the title is
designated. While playing, the chapter is designated.
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
Quick View
Play speed is quicker than normal.
Except
≥Press again to return to normal speed.
≥Image may not be played back smoothly in case of DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode titles or [AVCHD].
[-RW‹V›] (It will not work even if it
is finalised)
[-RW‹VR›], DivX
While paused, press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Slow-motion
Except DivX
≥[AVCHD]
Forward direction [5] only.
≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is continued for approximately 5 minutes
(excluding [DVD-V] [AVCHD]).
≥You cannot perform this operation when you playback the radio programme.
RQT9439
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced playback
While paused, press [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).
Each press shows the next frame.
≥Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Frame-by-frame
Except DivX
≥[AVCHD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.
≥You cannot perform this operation when you playback the radio programme.
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
Skipping the
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time and press [OK].
specified time
Play skips the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1 minute intervals. (Press and
hold for 10-minute intervals.)
(Time Slip)
Except [DVD-V] [AVCHD] DivX
This automatically disappears after approximately 5 seconds. To show the
-5min.
screen again press [TIME SLIP] again.
Press [MANUAL SKIP].
Manual Skip
Each time you press, play restarts approximately 1 minute later.
Except DivX
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen (> 79)
Aspect
Chapters are divided at the point pressed. (> 47)
Create Chapter
[HDD] [RAM]
Display the subtitle during play
[HDD]
Changing audio during play
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [DVD-V] [AVCHD] DivX
It is possible to display the subtitles during the playback if the
programme with subtitle is recorded with DR mode.
Press [AUDIO].
Press [STTL ].
It will switch depending on the contents recorded every time it is
pressed.
≥It will switch between On/Off every time it is pressed.
e.g., [HDD] “Audio LR, deu” is selected.
[DVD-V] [AVCHD] DivX
Display with “Subtitles” in the Disc menu (> 77).
HDD
PLAY
Display the Teletext during play
[HDD]
Audio LR
deu
It is possible to display the Teletext during the playback if the
programme with Teletext is recorded with DR mode.
[DVD-V] [AVCHD]
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (> 77, Soundtrack).
Press [TEXT ].
≥It will switch between On/Off every time it is pressed.
[Note]
≥List mode cannot be used. (> 27)
1 ENG
Digital 3/2.1ch
Soundtrack
≥Teletext cannot be displayed when the subtitle is On. (> above)
≥You cannot use “Skipping the specified time (Time Slip)”, “Manual
Skip” or “Create Chapter” when Teletext is being displayed.
e.g., English is selected.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and DVD-R DL
When switching layers:
Video and audio may momentarily cut
+R DL
+R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-
sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is not enough
space on the first layer to record a programme, the remainder is recorded
on the second layer. When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit
automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way
as a normal programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut
out when the unit is switching layers.
Second recordable layer
The available space
First recordable layer
Title
Title 2
Playback direction
(Inner section of the disc)
(Outer section of the disc)
RQT9439
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR
You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them by using
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Regarding Label [HDD]
Titles recorded to HDD will be categorized to the following labels
automatically depending on the contents of the titles.
It is convenient when searching for the titles you want to playback.
Press [2, 1] to select the label.
e.g., [HDD]
All:
All titles
Display status
(Grouped Titles or All Titles) (> right)
Not Viewed:
Titles that have not been viewed yet
Genre Label:
(News, Movie,
etc.)
Titles sorted in categories according to the
information of the recorded programme
≥Some titles may not be sorted correctly.
≥Categories for Genre Label can be changed.
(> 40)
Genre Label
([HDD] only) (> below)
Label§1
(> below)
(Grouped Titles)
Not Viewed Movie
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All
Video ( AVCHD ): High definition video acquired from the disc,
Social/Economi
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
SD card or USB device
ZDF
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
Berge und Flüsse
KiKa
3 sat
3 sat
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
Switching of the Navigator [HDD]
1 Press [OPTION].
ZDF
Helicopter Informationen
29.10(Wed)
Start Time 22:46 Rec Time0:01(DR)
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
29.10(Wed)
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” and
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
CAP 24
DV
press [OK].
PLAY
Page 001/002
Grouped Titles screen
Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly timer recording mode
are bundled and displayed as one item.
RETURN
OPTION
Previous
Edit Title
Next
Select
Delete Title
Selected title§3
Icons (> below)
Thumbnail§2
Select the item marked with
bundled titles.
and press [OK] to display the
§1
Label will only display “All” when using media other than HDD.
Thumbnail is displayed for the selected title only except for with
HDD.
(Grouped Titles)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports Video (AVCHD)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All
HDD
§2
Not Viewed
Movie
Social/Economi
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
ZDF
Helicopter Informationen
KiKa
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
ZDFdokuk
§3
If the title has a long name, the name scrolls once only.
3
sat
ZDF
Berge und Flüsse
29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46
Titles
4
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
KiKa
DV
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
OK
RETURN
Page 001/002
[
Currently recording.
Title protected.
OPTION
Previous
Next
Select
Edit Title
Delete Title
All Titles screen
Displays all titles.
Title that was not recorded due to recording protection
(All Titles)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports Video (AVCHD)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All
Title cannot be played
HDD
Not Viewed
Movie
Social/Economi
t
(When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.)
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
ZDF
Berge und Flüsse
KiKa
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
ZDFdokuk
3
sat
ZDF
Helicopter Informationen
29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46 Rec time0:01(DR)
Title that is copyright protected (One generation copy
is permitted) (> 30)
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
KiKa
DV
Title that is copyright protected (Copying is prohibited)
within playback period (> 30)
PLAY
RETURN
Page 001/002
OPTION
Previous
Edit Title
Next
Select
Delete Title
≥Playback period limit can be checked in the
Properties of that title. (> 45)
Title that is copyright protected (Copying is prohibited)
past playback period (> 30)
Playback the title that was viewed
once [HDD]
(Gray)
Groups of titles ([HDD] only)
You can choose to start the playback from the point you have last
stopped, or from the beginning when the resume play function
(> 37) is operating.
Title that has not yet been played ([HDD] only)
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play from the Beginning” or “Play
from Last Viewed” and press [OK].
Title recorded using a different encoding system from
that of the TV system currently selected on the unit.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(> 89).
Radio programme
RQT9439
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR
To change the Genre Label [HDD]
Genre displayed in the Genre Label can be changed.
1 Press [2, 1] to select the Genre Label (Movie, News, Sports,
etc.) and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Genre Label Setting” and press
[OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the genre and press [OK].
To play grouped titles [HDD]
(Grouped Titles screen only)
∫ Play the selected titles
1 Press [3, 4] to select the group and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press [OK].
∫ Play the titles continuously (Grouped Playback)
While the Grouped Titles screen is displayed,
Press [3, 4] to select the group and press [1] (PLAY).
To edit the group of titles [HDD]
(Grouped Titles screen only)
1 Press [3, 4] to select a title or a group and press the “Red”
button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
2 Press [OPTION].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the option and press [OK].
Create Group:
Press [2, 1] to select “Create” and press [OK].
Selected titles are bundled to form a group.
Release Grouping:
Press [2, 1] to select “Release” and press [OK].
≥All the titles in the group are released.
Remove:
(Only when titles in a group have been selected)
Press [2, 1] to select “Remove” and press [OK].
Selected titles are removed from the group.
∫ Regarding the group name
The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.
(Grouped Titles)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports Video (AVCHD)
(Grouped Titles)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports Video (AVCHD)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All
HDD
HDD
Not Viewed
Movie
Social/Economi
Not Viewed
Movie
Social/Economi
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
ZDF
Berge und Flüsse
ZDF
Helicopter Informationen
Start Time 22:46 Rc Time0:01(DR)
KiKa
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
29.10(Wed)
ZDFdokuk
29.10(Wed)
ZDFdokuk
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
ZDFdokuk
3
sat
30.10(Thu)
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
31.10(Fri)
Experiment
1
AV1
ZDF
Berge und Flüsse
29.10Wed) Start Time 22:46
Titles
4
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
KiKa
DV
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
PLAY
Page 001/001
OK
RETURN
Page 001/002
RETURN
OPTION
OPTION
Previous
Edit Title
Next
Select
Edit Title
Delete Title
Select
Delete Title
To change the group name
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select the group and press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Title Name” and press [OK].
Enter the name. (> 76, Entering text)
≥Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will
not be changed.
[Note]
≥These functions are only available for videos and not available for
music and still pictures.
RQT9439
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback of the High Definition Video (AVCHD)
[AVCHD]
e.g., [SD] DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Only AVCHD recorded or edited on a Panasonic’s video camera will
be recognised. An SD card or disc that contains AVCHD recorded on
devices other than a Panasonic’s video camera may not be
recognised.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Video ( AVCHD )
SD CARD
No. Date Day Time
Title Name
Fantasista
001 15.12 SAT 19:36
12:35 2007.12.07
002 07.12 FRI
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Rec time
00:00.07
1 Insert the disc or the SD card
The display below automatically appears.
Page 01/01
OPTION
Disc
e.g., [RAM]
OK
RETURN
DVD-RAM ( AVCHD )
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
To display the top menu
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
This disc is play-only and cannot be recorded or
copied to.
OK
When the top menu or the “DIRECT NAVIGATOR” is not
displayed
Refer to “Starting from a selected title” (> 37) to playback.
RETURN
[SD]
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Operation during play (> 37)
[Note]
SD card is inserted.
≥Multiple titles may not playback continuously depending on the
disc. Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], and playback by selecting the
title.
≥It may pause for a few seconds on the break of images when
editing such as partial deletion is performed.
≥High definition video (transfer rate of 24 Mbps or faster) cannot be
played back correctly if it was recorded on a DVD compatible with
double speed or slower.
OK
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Video
( AVCHD )” and press [OK].
≥If the top menu of the disc or SD card to play was
If the menu screen (> left) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
–Created:
Display the top menu
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
–Not created:
Display the “DIRECT NAVIGATOR” screen
If the “DIRECT NAVIGATOR” screen is not
displayed, press [1] (PLAY) to playback
and press [:, 9] or [6, 5] to
select the programme.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Press [3, 4] to select “DVD” and press [OK].
[SD]
Press [3, 4] to select “SD Card” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press [OK].
Playback of the playlist created on other equipment
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit.
press [OK].
Preparation
≥Insert a disc.
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
playlist and press [OK].
1
While stopped
e.g., [RAM]
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Playlists
DVD-RAM
Playlist View
02
2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVD” and
- -
- -
01
press [OK].
05.06(THU) 0:12.12
- -
05.07(MON) 0:07.31
- -
FUNCTION MENU
High Definition
Play all Video
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music
Previous
Next
Page 01/01
OK
OPTION
RETURN
TV Guide
Copy
DVD-RAM
Play Video
Playlists
Play Pictures
DVD Management
View
(
JPEG
)
Others
DVD
SD Card
USB
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
SD
Select for playback of disc and formatting of disc etc.
OK
RETURN
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Operation during play (> 37)
RQT9439
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DivX®
Using the tree screen to find a folder
Playing DivX video contents
1 While the file list is displayed
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Press [OPTION].
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Folder” and press
DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an
official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video.
[OK].
F: Selected folder no./
Total folder no. including
DivX title.
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
Select Folder
You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
F
1/21
12_02_2004
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
1 Insert a disc or USB memory.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
You cannot select folders
that contain no compatible
files.
OK
RETURN
e.g., [CD]
Page 01/01
CD
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
3 Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press [OK].
The file list for the folder appears.
Slect file type.
OK
To return to the previous screen
RETURN
Press [RETURN ].
≥It will go to step 3 automatically if only DivX is recorded on
the disc.
[USB]
USB
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Video
( DivX )” and press [OK].
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
DivX
No.
001
Title Name
ABC.divx
OK
RETURN
Select
OPTION
a
folder from OPTION menu.
Page 01/01
≥Files are treated as titles.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press [OK].
Play starts on the selected title.
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
If the menu screen (> above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
Press [3, 4] to select “DVD” and press [OK].
[USB]
Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].
[Note]
≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.
≥Successive play is not possible.
≥Playback is not possible during recording.
RQT9439
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About DivX Subtitle Text display
Regarding DivX VOD content
You can display subtitles text recorded onto the DivX video disc on
this unit.
This function has no relation to the subtitles specified in DivX
standard specifications and has no clear standard. Depending on
the methods used to create the file, the following functions may not
work.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:
This DivX® Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content.
First generate the DivX VOD registration code for your device and
submit it during the registration process.
[Important: DivX VOD content is protected by a DivX DRM (Digital
Rights Management) system that restricts playback to registered
DivX Certified devices. If you try to play DivX VOD content not
authorized for your device, the message “Authorisation Error.” will be
displayed and your content will not play.]
∫ Displaying subtitles text
1 During play, press [DISPLAY].
≥DivX video files that do not display “Text” do not contain
subtitles text.
Subtitles text cannot be displayed.
Learn more at www.divx.com/vod.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc” and press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Subtitles” and press
[1].
Display the unit’s registration code.
(> 91, “DivX Registration”)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “On”.
≥If the subtitles text are not displayed correctly, try changing the
language settings (> below).
DivX Registration
DivX® Video On Demand
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
8 alphanumeric characters
∫ Subtitles text language settings
After playing back a DivX video file containing subtitles text
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD / Disc” and press
[OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Settings for Playback”
and press [OK].
≥After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.
6 Press [3, 4] to select “DivX Subtitle Text” and
press [OK].
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Latin 1”, “Latin 2”, or
“Cyrillic” then press [OK].
≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)
≥The initial setting is “Latin 1”.
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
∫ Types of subtitles text file that can be displayed
Subtitles text that satisfy the following conditions can be displayed
on this unit.
≥File format: MicroDVD, SubRip, or TMPlayer
≥File extension: “.SRT”, “.srt”, “.SUB”, “.sub”, “.TXT”, or “.txt”
≥The DivX video file and subtitles text file are inside the same folder,
and the file names are the same except for the file extensions.
≥If there are more than one subtitles text files inside the same folder,
they are displayed in the following order of priority: “.srt”, “.sub”,
“.txt”.
≥The remaining number of plays decreases each time a program is
played. However, when playing from the point where play was
previously stopped, the remaining number of plays does not
decrease due to the resume play function.
∫ Limitations of this unit
≥In the following situations, the subtitles cannot be displayed as
recorded. Furthermore, depending on the methods used to create
the file or the state of the recording, only parts of the subtitles may
be displayed, or the subtitles may not be displayed at all.
– When special text or characters are included in the subtitles text.
– When the file size is larger than 256 KB.
– When characters with styling specified are included in the
subtitle data.
Codes that specify the character style within files are displayed
as subtitle characters.
– When data with a different format exists within the subtitle data.
≥If the file name of the DivX video file is not displayed correctly on
the menu screen (the file name is displayed as “_”), the subtitles
text may not be displayed correctly.
≥Depending on the disc, the subtitles text cannot be displayed when
search and other such operations are being performed.
RQT9439
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing titles
Editing
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You cannot edit finalised discs.)
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[+RW]
[-RW‹VR›] Only “Properties” is possible.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title.
Editing of the title can be performed with this unit.
For example, an unrequired part of the title can be deleted. (> 45,
Partial Delete)
e.g., [HDD]
(Grouped Titles)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports Video (AVCHD)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All
HDD
Not Viewed
Movie
Social/Economi
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
ZDF
Helicopter Informationen
KiKa
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
ZDFdokuk
3
sat
ZDF
Berge und Flüsse
29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46
Titles
4
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
KiKa
DV
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
OK
RETURN
Page 001/002
OPTION
Previous
Edit Title
Next
Select
Delete Title
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4] and press the “Red” button. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press the “Red” button again to
cancel.
[Note]
≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc).
≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount
of free space decreases.
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
≥With titles that are copyright protected (Copying is prohibited), you
cannot perform editing other than Delete, Properties. (> 30)
3 Press [OPTION].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
Preparation
press [OK].
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (> 80, Setting the protection).
Enter Title Name
Set up Protection
Refer to “Title
operations”
(> 45, 46).
Play from the Beginning
Cancel Protection
Play from Last Viewed
Partial Delete
Delete Title
Properties
Edit
Divide Title
Change Thumbnail
DR File Conversion
Edit or playback the chapter (> 47)
To edit the group of titles [HDD] (> 40)
Switching of the Navigator [HDD] (> 39)
Chapter View
Create Group
Release Grouping
All Titles
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9439
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Title operations
After performing steps 1–4 (> 44)
Delete Title§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (> 24).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Properties
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.
e.g., [HDD]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
Properties
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›]
Dinosaur
Date
Channel
29.05.2009(Fri)
ZDF
Rec Time 0:30 (SP)
Genre News
Start Time 12:19
You can give names to recorded titles.
(> 76, Entering text)
≥[HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.
Enter Title Name
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Set up Protection§
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.
(Grouped
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Cancel Protection§
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
All
Not Viewed
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
ZDF
29. 0(W
ZDF
Partial Delete
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.
1Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the
section you want to delete.
Partial Delete
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
Ancient wild
[HDD] [RAM]
Start
(> below, For your reference)
End
Next
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to start the playback when the title is paused.
Continue
0:43.21
2Press [3, 4] to select “Continue” and press [OK].
≥Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections. Up to 20 sections
can be set. (> go to step 1)
Please set the start
point with playback
operation and skip.
End
- -:--.--
Start
- -:- -.- -
OK
RETURN
Time Slip
Manual Skip
3Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Chapter Mark is generated in the scene that was partially deleted.
4Press [RETURN ].
≥You cannot perform this operation when you select the radio programme.
Divide Title
You can divide a title into two.
Divide Title
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
News
Not viewed
Ancient wild
Movie
PLAY
Sports
Divide
Video (AVCHD)
[HDD] [RAM]
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Continue” and press [OK].
Preview
(> below, For your reference)
3Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].
Continue
0:00.22
To confirm the division point
Divide
- -:- -.- -
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays
10 seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
OK
Manual Skip
RETURN
Time Slip
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the
point where you want to divide the title.
[Note]
≥The divided titles retain the title name and copy-restriction of the original title.
≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
≥[HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.
≥You cannot perform this operation when you select the radio programme.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] It is possible to change the image displayed on the top menu after finalising.
[+RW] It is possible to change the image displayed on the top menu after creating Top Menu.
Change Thumbnail
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[HDD] Settings for the “Change Thumbnail” is saved when high speed copy
Change Thumbnail
Not viewed
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
News
Movie
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
(> below, For your reference)
is performed to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R,
+R DL or +RW.
1Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
2Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a
Ancient wild
Change
Finish
0:00.00
Start play and select the image of
Change
- -:- -.- -
thumbnail is shown.
To change the thumbnail
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at the
point you want to change.
a
thumbnail.
OK
Manual Skip
RETURN
Time Slip
3Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
≥You cannot perform this operation when you select the radio programme.
§
Multiple editing is possible.
For your reference
≥Use Search (> 37), Time Slip (> 38) to find the desired point.
≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (> 37) and Frame-by-frame (> 38).
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).
RQT9439
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing titles
Title operations
After performing steps 1–4 (> 44)
DR File Conversion is a function to convert the recording mode of the
title in DR mode. The size of the converted title will be small regularly.
It will take about the same time as playback of the title to convert the
recording mode.
DR File Conversion
DR File Conversion
[HDD]
Convert the selected title by changing its recording mode.
Please select recording mode and other options, then press OK.
(Converting the recording mode)
Recording Mode
Subtitles
XP - - High Quality
Off
1Press [2, 1] to select recording mode and press
[4].
Timing
During standby
2Press [2, 1] to select whether to record the
subtitle or not and press [4].
OK
RETURN
“Automatic”
Subtitles will be recorded for titles with subtitles.
You cannot switch the subtitle on or off during the playback.
“Off”
Subtitle will not be recorded.
3Press [2, 1] to select when to start the conversion and press [OK].
“Now”
Conversion begins immediately after step 5.
Recording and playback are not available during conversion. Note also
that Timer recording will not be performed during conversion.
“During standby”
The conversion will be performed a short time after the unit is turned off in
a time slot for which no timer recording is set. If the power is switched on
during the conversion, the conversion will be cancelled, and start from the
beginning when the power is next switched off.
4Press [2, 1] to select whether to delete the original title after the conversion or
not and press [OK].
“Convert & Delete”
“Convert Only”
The original title will be deleted to save HDD capacity after conversion.
The original title remains after conversion.
≥The original title in DR format will be deleted after DR File Conversion when a title that is copyright
protected (One generation copy is permitted) is selected.
5To begin the conversion “Now”:
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
≥To cancel a conversion that is in progress
Press and hold [RETURN ] for more than 3 seconds.
To begin the conversion “During standby”:
Press [OK].
≥To remove a conversion setting
After performing steps 1–3 (> 44)
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “DR File Conversion” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥Conversion begins soon after the unit is turned off.
“COPY” on the unit’s display remains lighted during conversion. [Only when the “Unit’s Display” in the
Setup menu is set to “Bright” (> 88).]
(Grouped Titles)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports Video (AVCHD)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All
HDD
Not viewed
Movie
Social/Economi
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
ZDF
Berge und Flüsse
KiKa
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
ZDFdokuk
3
sat
ZDF
Helicopter Informationen
29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46 Rec time0:0(DR XP)
When “DR > ±± (Recording mode for
conversion)” is displayed in the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR, the conversion has not
finished.
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
Die Rückkehr der Zombes
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
KiKa
DV
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
PLAY
RETURN
Page 001/002
OPTION
Previous
Edit Title
Next
Select
Delete Title
[Note]
≥To use “DR File Conversion”, the HDD needs enough storage capacity. Please make space available on the
HDD.
≥The size of the converted title may increase for some combinations of programme and recording mode.
≥DR File Conversion is stopped when the power is turned on while the recording mode is converting with
power turned off. Conversion will start from the beginning again once the power is turned off.
≥The converted one of a title including multiple video and audio content will contain only single video and
audio content. The “Preferred Language” setting in the Setup menu (> 85) is applied.
≥During the conversion “Now” with “Subtitles” set to “Automatic” in step 2, you cannot turn off the subtitle
displayed on the television.
≥Teletext will not be recorded.
≥When recording to DVD disc with XP mode, select the audio to record with “Audio Mode for XP Recording”
before converting the recording mode. (> 88)
≥Select the audio to record when converting to “HG”, “HX”, “HE”, or “HL” mode. (> 88, Audio Channels for
HG / HX / HE / HL Recording)
≥In titles with the Auto Renewal Recording function (> 34) set, a programme may be unintentionally
converted while in “During standby”.
So it is recommended to convert the recording mode by selecting “Now”.
≥The aspect ratio will be recorded in accordance with “Aspect for Recording” of the Setup menu, regardless of
the recording mode for conversion. (> 86)
When converting to “XP”, “SP”, “LP” or “EP” mode, the title will be recorded with original aspect ratio if “Rec
for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”. (> 86)
≥Regarding titles recorded from radio service
The data size of the title recorded from radio service will be larger after converted for copy.
It is recommended that you keep them in DR mode.
RQT9439
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Create/Playback/Edit of the Chapter
[HDD] [RAM]
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Only playback of
chapter is possible.
press [OPTION].
Chapter
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Chapter View”
Each section between the division points becomes a chapter.
and press [OK].
Title
4 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter.
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
To start play > Press [OK].
To edit > Step 5.
To create > Press the “Green” button. (> below, Create
“Chapter Creation” in the Setup menu (> 86)
[HDD]
“Automatic”:
Chapter)
Chapter View screen
Chapter View
Time Remaining
45:54 (DR)
HDD
SOCCER
Play
Detects changes in the scene (like the start and the end of the
programme) during recording and sets chapter start points on
them automatically.
≥Depending on the programme to be recorded or the
Recording Mode, the chapter start points may not be created
correctly.
Press OK to start playing from
t
he
s
e
l
e
cted chapter.
Selected chapter can be edited
via OPTION.
Press RETURN to go back to
previous menu.
0:12.29
0:00.00
OK
RETURN
Select
Page 001/001
“5 minutes”:
O
P
TION
Edit Chapter Mark
Manual Skip
Sets chapter start points automatically during recording at
approximately 5-minute interval.
≥Chapters will not be created:
– when recording a radio broadcast
– when recording from the AV Input or DV input
5 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
≥The maximum number of chapters on a disc:
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[HDD] : Approx. 1000 per title
Delete Chapter
Refer to “Chapter operations”.
Combine Chapters
[RAM] : Approx. 1000 per disc
[Note]
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
≥[HDD] You will not be able to perform the Resume play function
(> 37) or the “Change Thumbnail” (> 45) with a title with the
maximum number of chapters.
≥[HDD] Chapter Marks created will be maintained when copied or
used “DR File Conversion”. But, it will not maintain the exceeded
amount if it exceeds the maximum chapter numbers.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
[Note]
≥You cannot perform this operation when you select the radio
programme.
Create Chapter Mark
During the playback or pause
Chapter operations
After performing steps 1–4 (> left)
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
≥Chapters are divided at the point pressed.
Select the point where you want to start a new
chapter while viewing the title.
Create
Chapter
Chapter View
Time Remaining
45:54 (DR)
HDD
SOCCER
Play
To insert chapter position,
press OK at selected time.
Press RETURN to go to
Chapter View.
0:01.22
Chapter has been created.
OK
RETURN
Create Chapter
Manual Skip
Time Slip
∫ To delete the Chapter Mark
1 While paused
1Press [OK] at the point you want
to divide.
Press [:, 9] and skip to the location you
want to delete.
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.
2 Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
2Press [RETURN ] to go to
Chapter View screen.
After performing steps 1–5 (> left)
Editing and playing chapters
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (> 80, Setting the protection).
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”
Delete
and press [OK].
Chapter§
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are
lost and cannot be restored. Make certain
before proceeding.
≥Select “Combine Chapters” (> below) when
you only want to delete the division point
between chapters. (The recorded contents
will not be deleted.)
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
(Grouped Titles)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All
HDD
Not Viewed
Movie
Social/Economi
Sports Video (AVCHD)
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
ZDF
Helicopter Informationen
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine”
KiKa
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
Combine
Chapters
ZDFdokuk
3
sat
and press [OK].
ZDF
Berge und Flüsse
29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46
Titles
4
≥The selected chapter and following chapter
are combined.
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
KiKa
DV
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
OK
RETURN
§
Page 001/002
Multiple editing is possible.
OPTION
Previous
Edit Title
Next
Select
Delete Title
Select with [2, 1] and press the “Red” button. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears.
Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
RQT9439
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
Copying
There are following copying methods.
Copy Title Playing
Copy the playing title on the HDD to the disc. (> 51)
Make a copying list and then copy.
You can set the unit to copy titles in the way you want. (> 52)
Copy
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
High definition video (AVCHD format) can be copied from disc, SD card, or USB. (> 58)
∫ Copy direction
Possible copying
Copy source
Copy destination
Copy speed
method
≥The high speed copy may not be
possible depending on the destination
disc or the title to copy. (> 50, When
is high speed copy not possible?)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Copy Title Playing
Copy
[HDD]
[RAM]
[-RW‹VR›]
[HDD]
[HDD]
Copy
Copy
High speed
[+RW]
Normal speed
Before finalise
[-R]
[-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›]
[+R]
Cannot copy
[+R]DL]
[DVD-V]
After finalise
[-R]
[-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[HDD]
Copy
Copy
Normal speed
[+R]DL]
SD Video (MPEG2 format)
≥From an SD card or
Panasonic’s video camera,
etc. (from USB)
[HDD] [RAM]
High speed
[-R] [-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Cannot copy
HD Video (AVCHD format)
≥From discs
[HDD]
[HDD]
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
High speed
High speed
HD Video (AVCHD format)
≥From an SD card or
Panasonic’s video camera,
etc. (from USB)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Cannot copy
[Note]
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been treated so, cannot be copied using this
unit.
RQT9439
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ Copy speed
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
Normal speed mode
High speed mode
Features
It will take same or longer time as the recorded time
of the copying title.
Copy with shorter time than the recorded time of the
title with same quality (recording mode).
≥Even if you select a recording mode with better
picture quality than the original, the picture quality
does not improve.
§1
§1
Are chapters maintained?
≤
≤
Are thumbnails
maintained?
§2
≤
≤
Recording and Playing
while Copying
§3
≤
–
§1
Position of the chapter might shift slightly.
It will not maintain the exceeded amount if it exceeds the maximum chapter numbers on a disc.
–[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : Approx. 1000
–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Approx. 254
(Depends on the state of recording.)
Position of the thumbnails might shift slightly. (May not be maintained depending on the state of recording.)
Possible only with titles on the HDD
§2
§3
[However it is not possible when copying with finalisation, creating Top Menu or when copying SD Video (MPEG2 format) or when copying HD
Video (AVCHD format).]
–You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
–Still pictures or music cannot be played.
Maximum writing speed of discs
DVD-RAM:
DVD-R:
5x Speed
12x Speed
4x Speed
4x Speed
+R:
8x Speed
4x Speed
4x Speed
+R DL:
+RW:
DVD-R DL:
DVD-RW:
[Note]
≥The above rate in the list indicates the shortest time and fastest speed required for copying one-hour title from HDD to the disc by High-Speed
copying.
≥The required amount of time and speed may vary depending on the conditions such as the area where information is written or unique feature
on the disc.
∫ Copying titles that are copyright protected
Copying not restricted
≥There are titles that can only be handled by HDD or DVD-RAM (CPRM compatible discs only).
One generation copy is permitted
≥You can copy to DVD-RAM (CPRM compatible discs only) only once.
However, the original title will be deleted. (> 30, 114)
≥You cannot copy to a DVD-RAM (not compatible with CPRM), DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.
≥You cannot copy from the copied disc to another disc.
Copying is prohibited
≥You cannot copy to disc.
RQT9439
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
∫ Frequently asked questions
When is high speed copy not possible?
It will copy at normal speed in following cases:
≥Copying to DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW in following
conditions:
– Titles in DR, HG, HX, HE or HL mode
– Title of the AVCHD copied to the HDD
≥Copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW in following conditions:
– Copy including a title that was recorded to HDD with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to
“Off” (> 86)
– Titles that contain many deleted segments.
– Titles that have been copied to the HDD from an SD card or a Panasonic’s video
camera, etc. with HDD (SD Video) (> 59).
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)”
mode.
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR (recordings
5 hours or longer)” mode
≥Setting the “Recording Mode” to anything but “High Speed” in “Copy”
≥Copying from +RW to HDD
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] When copying from the finalised disc to HDD
When copying titles in high speed mode to
high speed recording compatible discs
The sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal ( Silent )” in “DVD Speed for High
Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (> 86).
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When copying to disc in normal speed
mode
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal speed to the
HDD and then copied at high speed to the disc. The titles that were temporarily copied to
the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to the disc in the following cases.
– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When copying to a new blank disc, if
you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free
space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)
– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to be copied to
the disc is greater than 999 in total.
When stopping the copy during copy
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If copy is cancelled during the step while temporarily
copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied. However, if copy is cancelled during the
step while copying to disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the point
cancelled are copied.
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less.
Is it possible to copy to the disc, SD card,
or USB memory after copying HD video
(AVCHD format) to the HDD?
≥It can be copied to the disc.
– It will be copied with SD quality. (It cannot be copied as it is in HD picture quality.)
≥It cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory.
Regarding titles recorded in DR mode from
radio service
≥Picture data will be added to the titles recorded in DR mode from radio service when
copying them in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode or converting them to HG, HX, HE, HL, XP,
SP, LP, EP or FR mode using “DR File Conversion”. Therefore, the data size will be larger
after copying or “DR File Conversion”.
– If you are going to copy the titles to disc with least audio degradation
It is recommended that you select LP mode.
– If you are going to copy the titles to disc with least data size
It is recommended that you select them to EP (8 hours) mode.
MPEG-2 or AVCHD files are not recognised
≥Only MPEG2 or AVCHD recorded or edited on a Panasonic’s video camera will be
recognised. MPEG2 or AVCHD recorded or edited to USB memory or an SD card using
devices other than a Panasonic’s video camera may not be recognised.
RQT9439
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ Speed and recording mode when copying
Titles in DR, HG, HX, HE or HL modes
Copy Title Playing
Copy the playing title on the HDD to the disc.
≥It will start copying from the beginning of the title regardless of the
playing position.
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Copy destination
Copy Speed
Recording mode
[RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Normal speed
FR
1 Playback the title to copy.
Titles in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR modes
Copy destination
Copy Speed
Recording mode
High speed§1
[RAM]
Same as title to be
copied§1
§2
High speed§1,
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Same as title to be
copied§1
§1
When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space,
copy will perform at normal speed in FR mode.
Titles that were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 86)
set to “Off” will be copied with normal speed.
When copying the title in DR mode with multiple audio,
subtitles and Teletext
§2
≥Only the audio selected in the “Multi Audio” in the Disc menu
will be copied for the multiple audio. (> 77).
≥Subtitle displayed during playback will be copied.
Press [STTL ] to display the subtitle.
Select the subtitle with “Subtitles” in the Disc menu (> 77)
≥Teletext displayed during playback will be copied.
Press [TEXT ] to display the Teletext.
In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to
“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in
“EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source and the “Aspect for
Recording” (> 86) setting do not match.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:
–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
2 Press [OPTION].
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Title
Playing” and press [OK].
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R
and +R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after
copy (> 82). To play +RW on other players, we recommend you
create top menu (> 82), but they may not play on all DVD players.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.
Press [OK] to disappear the screen display.
≥Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.
≥To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS ].
[Note]
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the HDD
regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying)
RQT9439
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press the “Red” button.
Copying using the copying list—Copy
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
You can order titles as desired for copy to disc.
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
When copying the title in DR mode with multiple audio and
subtitles
≥Only the audio and subtitles selected in the “Preferred Language”
in the Setup menu will be copied for the multiple audio and
subtitles. (> 85).
≥Titles indicated with “
speed mode.
” can not be copied in high
≥To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
4 Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (> 53)
1
While stopped
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size”
(> 53) exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not
sufficient).
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
5 Press [2] to confirm.
press [OK].
6 Set other settings.
Copy
≥If you are not going to change these settings (> step 7)
Cancel All
Source
HDD
DVD
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Other Settings” and press [1].
1 Copy Direction
HDD DVD
Destination
“Subtitles”
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
(Only when copying titles in DR mode and the recording mode
other than High Speed is selected)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Subtitles” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Automatic” or “Off” and press [OK].
≥“Automatic”:
Information of the copy destination
-
-
DVD-RAM
Copy restricted titles can be
3 Create List
0
copied on to disc
Start Copying
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
Subtitle selected in the “Preferred Language“ in the Setup
menu (> 85) will be copied.
≥If you are not going to change the each setting (> step 7).
≥“Off”:
3 Set the copy direction.
Subtitle in the source titles will not be copied.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction
(> step 4).
“Finalise” or “Create Top Menu”
([HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] only)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” or “Create Top Menu” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
≥If “On” is selected
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to
“DVD”, or vice versa. (> step 6)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
–
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] After finalising, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
–[+RW] Create the Top Menu. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before
playing a +RW disc on other equipment.
4 Set the recording mode.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode
(> step 5).
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK].
6 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying” and press [OK].
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
To return to the previous screen in steps 1 to 7
Press [RETURN ].
5 Register titles for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (> step 6).
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
(You cannot stop while finalising or creating Top Menu)
Copy
Cancel All
Recording and playing while copying
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
(
0% )
Size:
0MB
1 Copy Direction
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising or creating Top
Menu).
Press [OK] to disappear the screen display.
≥Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.
≥To confirm the current progress
No. Size
Title
HDD DVD
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
3 Create List
0
Start Copying
OK
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
OPTION
RETURN
Press [STATUS ].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
[Note]
Create List Grouped Titles
HDD
≥Titles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be registered
simultaneously.
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the HDD
regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising or creating Top
Menu)
Date
25.05
01.01 AV2
Channel Time
12:36
Title Name
Soccer Digest
Titles
2
1
1:35
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Time
12:36
Rec time
0:52(SP)
Page 001/001
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Select
RQT9439
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ To check the properties of a title and sort
Copying list icons and functions
Copying list
Copying list indicators
After performing step 5–2 (> 52)
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press
[OPTION].
Titles that cannot be copied in high speed mode to
the inserted disc
Title contains still picture(s)
≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
Properties
Sort
Title recorded using a different encoding system
from that of the TV system currently selected on the
unit.
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Grouped Titles
≥Titles displaying these marks cannot be selected.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”
Data size of each registered item
and press [OK].
Properties:
Size:
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
(
0% )
Size:
0MB
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are
shown. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
Data size recorded to the copy destination
≥When copying at normal speed, the total
data size will change according to the
recording mode.
No. Size
Title
New item (Total=0)
Sort (All Titles screen only):
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
If you close the Copying list screen, the display order is cancelled.
≥The total data size shown may be larger
than the sum of the data sizes for each
registered item, because of data
management information being written to
the copy destination, etc.
Page 01/01
∫ To edit the copying list
Delete All
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy
(> 82). To play +RW on other players, we recommend you create
top menu (> 82), but they may not play on all DVD players.
Select the item after step 5–4 (> 52)
Add
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
Delete
[OK].
Move
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
1
Press [3, 4] to select the title and press the “Red” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
Press [OK].
2
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–2 (> 52)
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
RQT9439
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL
[DVD-V] > [HDD]
4
When the top menu is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
you want to start copying, and press
[OK].
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
My favorite
01/02
01
Chapter
02
Chapter
1
2
03
Chapter
04
Chapter
3
4
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 86) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (> 86) of the Setup menu.
05
06
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal
copying, and cannot be copied.
To return to the previous screen in steps 1 to 3
Press [RETURN ].
Preparation
≥Insert the finalised disc (> 15).
To stop copying after step 3
Press [∫].
You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
After performing steps 1–4 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-
Video”) (> 52, Copying using the copying list—Copy)
[Note]
1 Set “Copy Time”.
≥The screen on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
≥If you are not going to change the setting (> step 2).
≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of
copy to the end.
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top
menu does not display automatically, press
[1] (PLAY) to start.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].
≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
≥If you want to copy a title from a DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording
format), create a copy list and then copy (> 52, Copying using the
copying list—Copy).
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
≥Setting the copying time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
DVD HDD
2
Hour
00 Min.
2 Copy Mode
DVD-Video SP
Set the time
a
few minutes longer.
3 Copy Time
2:00
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
Press OK to change the setting.
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4]
to set the recording time.
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising
the disc (> 82).
RQT9439
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording broadcasts from external equipment
With Other
Equipment
Recording from Set Top Box
Recording disc: [HDD]
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (Set Top Box) — EXT LINK
Recording disc: [HDD]
Recording mode: XP, SP, LP, EP
Recording mode: XP, SP, LP, EP
Preparation
≥Connect a Set Top Box to this unit’s input terminals (> 97).
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 89).
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
To record programmes from Set Top Box using timer programming
Preparation
≥Make sure you connect the AV2 input terminal of this unit to the
Scart terminal of a Set Top Box with a 21-pin Scart cable (> 97).
≥Set “AV2 Input” to match the connected equipment in the Setup
menu (> 90).
≥Set “Ext Link” to match the connected equipment in the Setup
menu (> 90).
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
1 Make timer programming on the
external equipment.
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
2 Press [EXT LINK].
≥DR, HG, HX, HE, HL and FR mode cannot be selected.
≥“EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer
recording standby has been activated.
3 Select the channel on the other
equipment.
≥The guidance information of EXT LINK appears.
To set external link standby using the FUNCTION MENU display
Perform step 1 (> above)
4 Press [¥ REC].
1
2
3
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Ext Link Standby” and press [OK].
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To cancel the external control
To stop recording
Press [∫].
1
2
Turn on this unit.
Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer
recording standby. (“EXT-L” disappears.)
[Note]
≥It will be recorded in standard definition quality even if the
programme is in high definition.
[Note]
≥It will be recorded in standard definition quality even if the
programme is in high definition.
≥During EXIT LINK standby mode or recording, you cannot press
[INPUT SELECT] to select external input other than AV2.
≥In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to
cancel the setting after recording is finished.
≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), this function does not work.
≥This function does not work when “TV System” is set to “NTSC” in
the Setup menu (> 89).
≥This function does not work when recording from an external input
other than AV2.
≥This function does not work while recording 2 programmes
simultaneously with timer recording.
≥This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the
equipment’s operating instructions.
≥The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in
some cases.
≥When “Ext Link” is set to “Ext Link 2”, this function does not work if
the input signal is NTSC system.
≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later
timer recording are close to each other.
To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (> 45).
≥While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, AV1
output terminal outputs the signal which is input from the AV2 input
terminal irrespective of “AV1 Output” setting (> 90).
≥During EXIT LINK standby mode or recording, playback is
available on both HDD and DVD drive. However, during EXIT LINK
recording, still pictures or music cannot be played back.
≥When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display, Direct TV Recording is
unavailable.
RQT9439
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying from a video equipment (video cassette recorder, etc.)
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front
Manual recording
≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
Recording disc: [HDD]
Recording mode: XP, SP, LP, EP
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
≥When recording bilingual programmes, select “M1” or “M2” on the
external equipment.
This unit
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 89).
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
DV cable
(IEEE 1394,
4-pin)
Audio/Video
cable§
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select
“AV3”.
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
Other video equipment
recording mode.
≥DR, HG, HX, HE, HL and FR mode cannot be selected.
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
Connect to terminals of the same colour.
3 Start play on the other equipment.
§
4
When you want to start recording
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
Press [¥ REC].
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
Recording starts.
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
≥Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”
in the Setup menu (> 88).
≥When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video
camcorder), you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape
only.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 86) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (> 86) of the Setup menu.
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated to
prevent illegal copying. Any software (firmware) that has been
so treated cannot be recorded using this unit.
16:9 image such as wide broadcasting (> 31)
[Note]
[Note]
When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), this function does not work.
≥If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then
the video quality will be degraded.
≥While copying from DV input or executing the “Flexible Recording
via AV input” (> 57)
–Copy will stop when timer recording starts.
–Chasing playback, simultaneous rec and play, switching of the
broadcast or input cannot be performed.
RQT9439
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DV Automatic Recording
Flexible Recording via AV input
Recording disc: [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Recording mode: XP, SP, LP, EP
Recording disc: [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Recording mode: FR
Preparation
It is possible to record from equipment connected to the AV input
terminals.
1
Turn off this unit and DV equipment, then connect the equipment
with the unit’s DV input terminal (> 56).
Turn on this unit.
Preparation
2
≥[RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection (> 80, Setting the
protection).
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 89).
≥If you record to a disc, insert a disc (> 15).
≥[RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection (> 80, Setting the
protection).
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 89).
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
1 Turn on the DV equipment, and pause
play at the point you want recording to
start.
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select
“AV3”.
The following screen appears.
DV Automatic Recording
2
While stopped
Record from the DV unit?
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Rec to HDD
Rec to DVD
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
OK
RETURN
press [OK].
≥When the screen is not displayed
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Flexible
After performing step 1
Recording via AV input” and press
[OK].
1
2
3
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “DV Automatic Recording” and
press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Rec to HDD”
> Go to step 2
or “Rec to DVD” and press [OK].
≥It may take a while for the next screen to display while
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rec to HDD”
preparing to record.
or “Rec to DVD” and press [OK].
Flexible Recording via AV input
≥It may take a while for the next screen to display while
Please set recording time. Record in FR mode.
Maximum recording time
preparing to record.
8 hour 00 min.
Set recording time
3 Press [REC MODE] to select the
8
00
Min.
recording mode.
Hour
Start Cancel
OK
≥DR, HG, HX, HE, HL and FR mode cannot be selected.
RETURN
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and
press [OK].
Recording starts.
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
recording time.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥You cannot record more than maximum recording time.
[Note]
7 Start play on the other equipment.
≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), this function does not work.
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., Panasonic’s video camera,
etc.) can be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
≥It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV
equipment.
8
When you want to start recording
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
To exit the screen without recording
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
≥[-R] [+R] It may not be able to record after repeating about 30 times
of step 4 or recording or editing.
Press [RETURN ].
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS ].
[Note]
≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), this function does not work.
≥[-R] [+R] It may not be able to record after repeating about 30 times
of step 8 or recording or editing.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] After finalising, chapters for every 5 minutes will be
created.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] After finalising, chapters for every 5 minutes will be
created.
≥[+R] After finalising, chapters for every 8 minutes will be created.
≥[+RW] Regardless of creating top menu, chapters for every
8 minutes will be created.
≥[+R] After finalising, chapters for every 8 minutes will be created.
≥[+RW] Regardless of creating top menu, chapters for every
8 minutes will be created.
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the unit
off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (> 56).
RQT9439
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copy the HD Video (AVCHD format) or the SD Video (MPEG2 format)
Copying HD Video (AVCHD format)
It is possible to copy the HD video (AVCHD format) recorded on the Panasonic’s video camera, etc. to the HDD.
∫ From an SD card or Discs
∫ From a video equipment
[AVCHD] (Disc) > [HDD]
HDD of Panasonic’s video camera, etc. > [HDD]
≥You cannot playback HD Video in the HDD of Panasonic’s video
camera, etc. with this unit.
[AVCHD] (SD card) > [HDD]
You must copy the files to the HDD.
HDD
HDD
HDD
USB connection cable
(specified cable such as accessory of the USB
equipment)
1 Insert a disc or card.
Preparation
e.g., [SD]
Turn on both this unit and the Panasonic’s video camera, etc.
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
1 Connect the Panasonic’s video
camera, etc. to this unit.
SD card is inserted.
2 Select the appropriate mode that
OK
RETURN
makes the Panasonic’s video camera
ready for data transfer (such as “PC
CONNECT”) on the Panasonic’s video
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video
camera, etc.
( AVCHD )” and press [OK].
≥Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
USB
3 The confirmation screen appears and
press [OK].
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Destination Capacity: 472583MB
Size:
0MB( 0%) Total
:
0
SD
HDD
USB device is inserted.
No. Date Day
001
002 25.05 SAT
Channel Time
Title Name
OK
Time
Rec time
18:19
25.05 SAT
12:36
12:37
1:35
RETURN
0:10
120 MB
01.01 SUN
003
004
Size
01.01
SUN
1:13
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in the
USB device.
Page 01/01
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video
OK
OPTION
Select
RETURN
( AVCHD )” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
4 The confirmation screen appears and
press [OK].
press the “Red” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
5 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press the “Red” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
5 Press [OK].
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
6 Press [OK].
press [OK].
7 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
[Note]
≥Record, playback, or timer recording cannot be executed while
copying.
If the menu screen (> above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
≥Copy cannot be executed while recording or playback.
≥An AVCHD title with more than 100 scenes will be divided into titles
every 99th scene and copied.
≥Copied video will be displayed as “AVCHD” in the “Channel”
column of the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
≥Depending on the recording condition with the high definition
camera, scenes recorded on same day might have different titles
(“-1”, “-2” appended to date).
≥See the instructions of the equipment used to record.
≥After copying AVCHD to HDD, it can be copied to DVDs with
standard definition quality. It is not recommended to delete original
AVCHD.
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Press [3, 4] to select “DVD” and press [OK].
[SD]
Press [3, 4] to select “SD Card” and press [OK].
[USB]
Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].
RQT9439
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying SD Video (MPEG2 format)
It is possible to copy the SD video (MPEG2 format) recorded on the Panasonic video camera, etc. to the HDD or disc.
∫ From an SD card
∫ From a video equipment
[SD] > [HDD] [RAM]
HDD of Panasonic’s video camera > [HDD] [RAM]
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
HDD
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
1 Insert a card.
USB connection cable
(specified cable such as accessory of the USB
equipment)
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Preparation
Turn on both this unit and the camera.
1 Connect the Panasonic’s video
camera, etc. to this unit.
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in the
card.
2 Select the appropriate mode that
makes the Panasonic’s video camera,
etc. ready for data transfer (such as
“PC CONNECT”) on the Panasonic’s
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video
( MPEG2 )” and press [OK].
video camera, etc.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
≥Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
Copying” and press [OK].
USB
How to copy
Play Video ( DivX )
Refer to “Copying using the copying list—Copy” (> 52)
Please set the items in step 3 and 4 as shown below.
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Direction:
Source : SD CARD
USB device is inserted.
OK
Copy Mode:
RETURN
Format : VIDEO
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in the
USB device.
≥SD Video on an SD card are automatically registered on the
copy list.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
( MPEG2 )” and press [OK].
press [OK] to start copying.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying list—Copy” (> 52)
Please set the items in step 3 and 4 as shown below.
Copy Direction:
Source : USB
Copy Mode:
Format : VIDEO
≥SD Video on the Panasonic’s video camera, etc. are
automatically registered on the copy list.
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
[Note]
≥You cannot playback SD Video on an SD card or in the HDD of the
Panasonic’s video camera, etc. with this unit. You must copy the
files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
If the menu screen (> above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
[SD]
Press [3, 4] to select “SD Card” and press [OK].
[USB]
Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].
RQT9439
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing still pictures
Still pictures
Still pictures
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] [SD]
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
≥You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW, USB memory and SD card.
≥You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.
album of “Album” or date of “Pictures
by Date” and press [OK].
≥Picture list screen is displayed.
1
[HDD]
e.g., [HDD]
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Picture View
Pictures by Date
04.02.2007
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] [SD]
Insert the disc, the SD card or USB memory.
The display below automatically appears.
Picture list screen
Disc
e.g., [CD]
CD
Page 001/001
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Select
Slideshow
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Picture View screen icons
Picture and Album protected.
Slect file type.
OK
RETURN
[HDD]
[SD]
Date that has not yet been viewed
(Only still pictures copied with “Copy All Pictures
( JPEG )” or “Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )”)
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
[USB]
picture and press [OK].
USB
≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (> 61)
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
To return to previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
If the menu screen (> left) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Pictures
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
Press [3, 4] to select “DVD” and press [OK].
[SD]
Press [3, 4] to select “SD Card” and press [OK].
[USB]
( JPEG )” and press [OK].
∫ Switching the Picture View appearance
[HDD] [RAM]
Still pictures copied from SD cards and USB memories are
grouped by the shooting date on Pictures by Date screen.
Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “View Album” or “Pictures by Date”
and press [OK].
Picture View
Album
Picture View
Pictures by Date
001
002
001
002
08.09.2006
Total 19
04.02.2007
Total
9
Total 19
Total
9
Press OK to display pictures.
Press OK to display pictures.
Page 01/01
Slideshow
Page 01/01
Slideshow
OK
OK
OPTION
OPTION
Select
RETURN
Select
RETURN
Pictures by Date screen
Album screen
RQT9439
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful functions during still picture play
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.
Start
Slideshow
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album or date.§
2 Press [1] (PLAY).
You can also start Slideshow with following steps.
After performing step 1 (> above)
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and press [OK].
To end the slide show
Press [RETURN ].
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album or date.§
2 Press [OPTION].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Slideshow Settings” and press [OK].
4 After completing the following settings, press [3, 4, 2, 1] to
select “Set” and press [OK].
Slideshow
Settings
e.g,
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Slideshow Settings
Please set the following functions.
≥To change the display interval
After performing steps 1–3
Normal
Display Interval
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Display Interval”.
Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval.
Transition Effect
Repeat Play
Fade
On
Off
Soundtrack
≥To change the transition effect
After performing steps 1–3
Sample Soundtrack
Select Soundtrack
Set
Ca
ncel
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Transition Effect”.
Press [2, 1] to select the transition effect.
RETURN
“Fade”: Pictures are changed by fading out and fading in.
“Motion”: Pictures are changed by fading out and fading in, while it is enlarged, reduced, or moved up or down.
“Random”: In addition to the “Motion”, pictures are changed by various methods.
≥To set repeat play
After performing steps 1–3
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play”.
Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off”.
≥To playback the music
Sample music in this unit or music stored on the HDD (My Favourites or Playlists) (> 67) or the USB can be played
during the playback of the slideshow.
After performing steps 1–3
Select Soundtrack
e.g., [HDD]
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Soundtrack”.
Press [2, 1] to select “On”.
Please select music playlist for soundtrack.
ꢀ
Sample Soundtrack
≥To change the music to playback
My Favourites
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Select Soundtrack” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the storage location and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the music playlist and press [OK].
01
02
03
OK
RETURN
While playing
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
e.g,
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press [OK].
≥Rotation information will not be stored in the following cases.
–[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Still pictures
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
OK
–When disc or card is protected
RETURN
–When played on other equipment
–When copying pictures
–When changing date
≥If you remove the SD card while the Picture View screen is displayed, picture rotation information may not be properly
stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the Picture View screen.
While playing
Zoom in
Zoom out
e.g,
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].
Rotate RIGHT
≥Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press [OK] to resume the display size of the still
Rotate LEFT
picture.
Zoom in
≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
OK
≥The Zoom in information will not be stored.
RETURN
≥This function is only available for small-sized still pictures.
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
Properties
e.g., [HDD]
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album or date and press
Properties
[OK].§
Folder Picture\DCIM001\001
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture.
Name Image0001.JPG
3 Press [OPTION].
No.
0001
Image Size 640 X 480
Date
27.05.2009 WED
File Size
142 KB
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” and press [OK].
While playing
Time 11:00
OK
RETURN
Press [STATUS
] twice.
Shooting date
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [STATUS ].
§
To switch the “Album” or “Pictures by Date” (> 60, step 2)
RQT9439
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing still pictures
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
Editing still pictures (JPEG)
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
and press [OK].
(e.g., [HDD] Pictures by Date)
≥Editing can be done in units of pictures, albums, or dates.
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-
R/CD-RW and USB memory.
Useful functions during still picture
play (> 61)
View Album
Start Slideshow
Preparation
Slideshow Settings
Copy to Album
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (> 11, 80, Setting the protection).
Copy
Copy to New Album
Copy to DVD-RAM
Change Date
Delete
1
[HDD]
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Still pictures operation (> 63)
[RAM] [SD]
(e.g., [HDD] Album)
Insert the disc or the SD card.
The menu is automatically displayed.
Useful functions during still picture
play (> 61)
Pictures by Date
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Disc
e.g., [RAM]
[SD]
Copy to Album
DVD-RAM
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy to New Album
Copy to DVD-RAM
Play Video
Copy Album
Edit Album
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy
Enter Album Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Delete Album
SD card is inserted.
DVD-RAM is inserted.
OK
OK
RETURN
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
Still pictures operation (> 63)
(e.g., [HDD] Picture list in the Pictures by Date View)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Pictures
( JPEG )” and press [OK].
Useful functions during still picture play
(> 61)
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
∫ Switching the Picture View appearance
Copy to Album
Properties
[HDD] [RAM]
Copy to New Album
Copy Pictures
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “View Album” or “Pictures by Date”
and press [OK].
Change Date
Edit Pictures
Set up Protection
Delete Pictures
Cancel Protection
e.g., [HDD]
Pictures by Date
Pictures by Date screen
Picture View
Pictures by Date
002
001
Still pictures operation (> 63)
08.09.2006
Total 19
04.02.2007
Total
9
(e.g., [SD] Album)
Useful functions during still picture play
(> 61)
Start Slideshow
Press OK to display pictures.
Page 01/01
Slideshow
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Select
Slideshow Settings
Enter Album Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Edit Album
3
Editing an album or date:
Delete Album
Select the album or date to be edited
and press [OPTION].
Still pictures operation (> 63)
(e.g., [SD] Picture list)
Editing a still picture:
1Select the album or date which contains the
still picture to edit and press [OK].
Useful functions during still picture play
(> 61)
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Properties
e.g., [HDD]
Picture View
Album
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
001
002
Edit Pictures
Total 19
Total
9
Delete Pictures
Still pictures operation (> 63)
View Album
Press OK to display pictures.
Page 01/01
Slideshow
OK
OPTION
Select
RETURN
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
2Select the still pictures to edit and press
[OPTION].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
If the menu screen (> step 1) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press the “Red” button.
(Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press the “Red” button again to
cancel.
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
[RAM]
Press [3, 4] to select “DVD” and press [OK].
[SD]
Press [3, 4] to select “SD Card” and press [OK].
RQT9439
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Still pictures operation
After performing steps 1–3 (> 62)
Copy to Album§
Copy the selected album, date, or pictures to an existing album.
1Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the destination album and press [OK].
≥The destination album with protect setting cannot be copied to.
[HDD] [RAM]
≥After copying, the screen shows the Album screen automatically.
Copy to New Album§
Copy the selected album, date, or pictures to new album.
1Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
2Press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM]
3Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No”and press [OK].
≥If “Yes” is selected:
You can give names to albums. (> 76, Entering text)
≥If “No” is selected:
Date of the first recorded picture in the album becomes the album name automatically.
(If there is no information about the recording date, it will become “--.--.----”.)
≥After copying, the screen shows the Album screen automatically.
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
Copy to DVD-RAM
[HDD]
Copy to HDD
[RAM]
Change Date§
Change the date of a folder and move the picture in it into the folder of the changed date.
1Press [2, 1] to select the item and press [3, 4] to change.
2Press [OK].
≥You can also change the date of a picture.
[HDD] [RAM]
(Pictures by Date only)
≥Date folder of the original is maintained even if all original pictures were deleted after changing
the date of folder. Delete it if unrequired.
≥If there is no folder with the changed date, a new folder will be created.
You can give names to albums.
(> 76, Entering text)
≥Album names input using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment.
Enter Album Name
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
(Album only)
Set up Protection§
Cancel Protection§
If set, this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected.
≥Even if the protection setting is used by this unit to protect an album, the album may be deleted by
another unit.
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
(Album and picture list only)
Delete§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
≥[RAM] [SD] If there is a file other than DCF format or other folder exists in the date or album, only
the pictures will be deleted, and the date or the album itself will not be deleted.
Delete Album§
Delete Pictures§
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
§
Multiple editing is possible.
[Copy to Album, Copy to New Album, Change Date : Only when the picture list is displayed]
[Note]
≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Copy to Album”, “Copy to New Album”, “Change Date”, “Copy to DVD-RAM” or “Copy to HDD”.
RQT9439
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying still pictures
[HDD] [RAM] [USB] [SD]
≥Pictures copied from SD card and USB memory will be categorised
according to the shooting date. Pictures without shooting date will
be categorised using the creation date.
≥The pictures recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW
cannot be copied.
Copying all the still pictures on the USB
memory—Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
[USB] > [HDD]
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 112), copying will
stop partway through.
≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
≥Timer recording will not start while copying still pictures.
1
While stopped
Insert the USB memory.
The menu is automatically displayed.
USB
Copying new still pictures on the SD
card—Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
[SD] > [HDD]
This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if
still pictures are imported from the same SD card, then only new still
pictures will be imported.
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in the
USB memory.
1
While stopped
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures
( JPEG )” and press [OK].
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Insert the SD card.
The menu is automatically displayed.
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy from
USB
Copy to
HDD
SD card is inserted.
OK
Copy all pictures ( JPEG ) by date.
RETURN
Copy
Cancel
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in the
card.
OK
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
( JPEG )” and press [OK].
press [OK].
Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )
≥
will be displayed on the Pictures by Date screen of the
Picture View for the added pictures.
Copy from
Copy to
SD CARD
HDD
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
Copy added pictures ( JPEG ) by date.
Copy
Cancel
If the menu screen (> above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
OK
RETURN
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
[Note]
≥Protection of the card is
–Set: Copy will start
≥The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same
at the copy destination.
–Not set: Go to step 4
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &
Copying using the copying list
Delete” or “Copy Only” and press
[OK].
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [SD]
[SD] ,-. [RAM]
If “Copy & Delete” is selected
Copied pictures in the SD card will be deleted after copying.
If “Copy Only” is selected
[USB] > [HDD] [RAM]
1
While stopped
Pictures will not be deleted.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
≥
will be displayed on the Pictures by Date screen of the
Picture View for the added pictures.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
Copy
Cancel All
Source
SD CARD
HDD
If the menu screen (> above) is not displayed, display it by
1 Copy Direction
SD CARD HDD
performing the following operation.
Destination
2 Copy Mode
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “SD Card” and press [OK].
PICTURE High Speed
3 Create List
0
Start Copying
[Note]
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
≥This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and 30
SD cards. If additional still pictures are imported, then the older
information will be deleted.
≥If you are not going to change each setting (> step 6).
RQT9439
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Set the copy direction.
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction
(> step 4).
Copying” and press [OK].
≥[Only when copied with “By Picture ( Album )” from [HDD] to
[RAM] [SD], or from [RAM] to [HDD] [SD] ]
When specifying another album as the copying
destination, select “Album”.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
Album
New album
4 Set the copy mode.
7 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode
(> step 5).
press [OK] to start copying.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
To return to the previous screen in steps 1 to 7
Press [RETURN ].
To stop copying after step 7
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
5 Register still pictures for copy.
[Note]
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy
list may not be the same at the copy destination.
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still
pictures.
changes to it (> step 6).
≥Pictures from different dates or albums will not be registered
to same list.
Copy
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
1 Copy Direction
By Picture
(
Date
)
New Item
No.
∫ To edit the copying list
HDD DVD
Size
Title
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
Select the item after step 5–3 (> left)
1 Press [OPTION].
Delete All
3 Create List
0
Add
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
Page 01/01
Start Copying
OK
Delete
[OK].
Create copy list.
OPTION
RETURN
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Add:
By Picture ( Date )
New Item
Add new items to the copying list.
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press the “Red”
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Item” and press [OK].
button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
e.g., [HDD]
e.g., [SD]
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
Press [OK].
By Picture ( Date )
Picture
Album
2
By Picture ( Album )
By Date Folder
By Album
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–2 (> 64, Copying using the copying list)
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Register with “By Picture ( Date )”/“By Picture ( Album )”/
“Picture”
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press the
“Red” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
≥Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item
at a time.
∫ To select another “Album” or “Date”
After performing step 5–2 [> left, Register with “By Picture ( Date )”/
“By Picture ( Album )”/“Picture”]
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Album” or “Select Date” and
≥To select another “Album” or “Date” (> right)
press [OK].
3
4
Press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Album” or “Date” and press
≥To edit the copying list (> right)
Press [2] to confirm.
[OK].
≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
Register with “By Date Folder”/“By Album”/“Album”
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the folder and press the
“Red” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
≥Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item
at a time.
3
4
Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (> right)
Press [2] to confirm.
RQT9439
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing music
Music
Music
[Note]
When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes during
music playback, the screen saver is displayed [only when the
“Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (> 88)]. To return to
the previous screen, press [RETURN ].
Playing MP3 files
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
≥You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while recording.
Playing music CD
1
While stopped
While stopped
Insert a music CD.
Insert a disc or USB memory.
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database (> 71) and
searches for the title information.
e.g., [CD]
[USB]
CD
USB
Play Video ( DivX )
P O W E R E D B Y
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Slect file type.
USB device is inserted.
OK
OK
RETURN
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each media.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Playback will automatically start if only MP3 is
recorded.
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press
[OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play / Copy
≥Playback will automatically start.
Music ( MP3 )” and press [OK].
≥Playback will automatically start.
0.09
4.30
Music View
CD
Track List
March Moon
0.09
e.g., [CD]
Music View
CD ( MP3 )
Do this flower open?
Track Name
March Moon
Do this flower open?
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
Track List
March Moon
No.
Artist
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Folder: Mexican pops
Track Name
Playing track
01
02
03
04
05
No.
Artist
Playing track
0001 March Moon
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Do this flower open?
0002
0003
0004
0005
If eastern wind has gone
Leon I
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
If eastern wind has gone
OK
OPTION
Slideshow
RETURN
Retry access
Copy All
to HDD
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Slideshow
Copy All
to HDD
Playing different track
Press [3, 4] to select the track and press [OK].
Playing different track
Press [3, 4] to select the track and press [OK].
Reacquire the CD title
Press the “Yellow” button.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Playback of track will stop.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Playback of track will stop.
If the menu screen (> above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
[Note]
When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes during
music playback, the screen saver is displayed [only when the
“Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (> 88).]. To return
to the previous screen, press [RETURN ].
Press [3, 4] to select “DVD” and press [OK].
[USB]
Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].
Using the tree screen to find a folder
1 While the Track List is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Folder” and press
[OK].
Selected folder No. /Total folder
If the folder has no track, “– –” is displayed as folder number.
0.09
Music View
CD ( MP3 )
Select Folder
MP3 music
March Moon
F
7/27
001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
You cannot select
folders that contain no
compatible files.
OK
002 Standard number
RETURN
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a folder and press
[OK].
The Track List for the folder appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
RQT9439
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing music recorded on HDD
Copying music to HDD (> 71)
4 Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [OK].
0.09
4.30
Music View
HDD
Track List
March Moon
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Do this flower open?
Track Name
No.
Artist
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Playing track
0001 March Moon
Do this flower open?
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
If eastern wind has gone
0002
0003
0004
0005
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”
Leon I
and press [OK].
Music View
HDD
Menu
Total Tracks 53
OPTION
OK
Slideshow
Add to My
Favourites
RETURN
Artists
Albums
Playing different track
Press [3, 4] to select the track and press [OK].
My Favourites
Playlists
Frequently Played
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Random Play
OPTION
Please select to access music.
OK
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RETURN
Playback of track will stop.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [OK].
[Note]
≥You cannot play music tracks on HDD while copying.
≥When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes during
music playback, the screen saver is displayed [only when the
“Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (> 88)]. To return
to the previous screen, press [RETURN ].
Artists
Albums
My Favourites
Playlists
Frequently Played
Random Play
1 Categorise by artist
2 Categorise by album
3 Tracks registered in “My Favourites”
4 Tracks registered in “Playlists”
5 Tracks played most within 200 tracks played recently (up
to 30 Tracks)
6 Random playback of all tracks
∫ When “Artists” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the artist.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the name of the artist and press
[OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the album and press [OK].
∫ When “Albums” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the album.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the album and press [OK].
RQT9439
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing music
Useful functions during music play
[HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Operations during play
Press [∫].
Stop
Press [;].
Pause
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Press [6] or [5].
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Search
Skip
During play or while paused,
press [:] or [9].
Skip to the track you want to play.
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
While Track List screen is displayed
Press [3, 4] to select the track and press the “Green” button.
≥Up to 99 tracks can be registered.
Register a track to
the “My Favourites”
[HDD]
While Track List screen is displayed
Properties
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select the track.
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” and press [OK].
≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
[HDD]
1
2
3
4
Press [DISPLAY].
Repeat Play
Random
Press [3, 4] to select “Play” and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play” or “Random” and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select the item.
≥Repeat Play
“All”: Repeatedly playback the selected album, etc.
“Track”: Repeatedly playback the selected track
“Off”
≥Random
“On”: Randomly playback the selected album, etc.
“Off”
This feature gives you a more natural sound by adding higher frequency signals not recorded on the track.
Re-master 1
Re-master 2
1
2
3
4
Press [DISPLAY].
Press [3, 4] to select “Sound” and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Sound Effects” and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Re-master 1” or “Re-master 2”.
≥This function is effective for audio from the HDMI terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal only when
“Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Plus”, “DTS” or “MPEG” is set to “PCM” (> 87). (However, in this case, audio is
output as 2ch from the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.)
Sample pictures in this unit or pictures stored on the “Album” of the HDD can be played back as slideshow during
playback of the music.
Display Still
Pictures
(Slideshow)
While playing the music
Press the “Red” button.
Select Picture Album
Change the pictures to display
Please select the album to start slidshow.
1
2
3
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Select Picture Album” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the album and press [OK].
Sample Pictures
My Favourites
My Travel
While playing music a picture slideshow
can be displayed.
OK
RETURN
To end the slide show
Press [RETURN ].
≥It will also end when the music is stopped.
When the unit is connected to a Panasonic TV (VIERA) that supports HDAVI Control 2 or later, the unit is turned
off if the power to the television is turned off, since “Power off link” (> 72) operates.
Playing music
continuously even
after turning off
power to the
The following operations make it possible to keep the power of the unit ON and to play music continuously.
1 While playing music
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “TV Power Off” and press [OK].
television
≥Sound may be discontinued for several seconds when the power to the television is turned off.
≥If the operation mentioned above is executed while audio is output from the television, the sound may not be
output from the amplifier/receiver. It is recommended to set the amplifier/receiver beforehand so that audio will
be output from the amplifier/receiver.
RQT9439
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing music/playlist
Album and track operation
Editing music
After performing steps 1–5 (> left)
[HDD]
Delete all tracks in the HDD.
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”
and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded
contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
Delete All Tracks
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
≥While displaying “Menu”
screen
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”
and press [OK].
≥When doing “Delete All Tracks”, “Clear My Favourites” or
“Clear Frequently Played” (> go to step 4)
Music View
HDD
Menu
Total Tracks 53
All tracks in the selected Artist or
Album are deleted in case of “Delete
All Tracks” or “Delete Album”.
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded
contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
Delete All Tracks
≥While displaying “Artists”
Artists
screen
Albums
Delete Album
My Favourites
Playlists
≥While displaying “Albums”
screen
Delete
Frequently Played
Random Play
OPTION
Please select to access music.
OK
RETURN
(> 76, Entering text)
Edit Album Name
Edit Track Name
Edit Artist Name
3 Press [3, 4] to select item and press
[OK].
Remove all tracks in “My Favourites”.
Tracks themselves are not deleted
from the HDD.
Press [2, 1] to select “Clear” and
press [OK].
Clear My
∫ When “Artists” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the artist.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the name of the artist, and press
[OK].
Favourites
≥While displaying “Menu”
screen
3 Press [3, 4] to select the album.
≥To edit the track, press [OK], and select the track with
[3, 4].
Remove all tracks in “Frequently
Played”. Tracks themselves are not
deleted from the HDD.
Press [2, 1] to select “Clear” and
press [OK].
Clear Frequently
Played
≥While displaying “Menu”
∫ When “Albums” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the album.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the album.
≥To edit the track, press [OK], and select the track with
[3, 4].
screen
Selected track is removed. Track itself
is not deleted from the HDD.
Press [2, 1] to select “Remove”
and press [OK].
Remove
≥While displaying “My
Favourites” or “Frequently
Played” screen
4 Press [OPTION].
5 Press [3, 4] to select item and press
[OK].
e.g., while selecting album
Delete Album
(> 70)
Album and track operation
Add to Playlist
(> right)
Edit Album Name
e.g., while selecting artist
Delete All Tracks
Edit Artist Name
Album and track operation (> right)
e.g., while selecting track
Delete
(> 70)
Add to Playlist
Album and track operation (> right)
Edit Track Name
Edit Artist Name
(> 68)
Properties
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9439
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing music/playlist
Register track to Playlist
Editing Playlist
[HDD]
[HDD]
You can register your favourite albums and tracks into 10 preset
playlists.
≥Name of the playlist can be changed.
≥New playlist cannot be added.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”
≥Up to 999 tracks can be registered to each playlist.
and press [OK].
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”
and press [OK].
4
Edit the playlist
Music View
HDD
Menu
Total Tracks 53
Press [3, 4] to select the playlist and
press [OPTION].
Artists
e.g., while selecting playlist
Albums
My Favourites
Playlists
Remove All Tracks
Frequently Played
(> below)
Edit Playlist Name
Random Play
OPTION
Please select to access music.
OK
RETURN
Edit the track in the playlist
3 Press [3, 4] to select item and press
1Press [3, 4] to select the playlist and
press [OK].
2Press [3, 4] to select the track and press
[OPTION].
[OK].
∫ When “Artists” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the artist.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the name of the artist, and press
[OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the album.
≥To register the track, press [OK], and select the track with
[3, 4].
e.g., while selecting the track in playlist
(> below)
Remove
(> left)
Add to Playlist
Edit Track Name
Edit Artist Name
Properties
(> 69)
∫ When “Albums” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the album.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the album.
≥To register the track, press [OK], and select the track with
[3, 4].
(> 68)
5 Press [3, 4] to select item and press
4 Press [OPTION].
[OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Add to
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Playlist” and press [OK].
To exit the screen
6 Press [3, 4] and select the playlist to
Press [EXIT].
register, and press [OK].
Playlist operation
Music View
Playlists
HDD
After performing steps 1–4 (> above, Editing Playlist)
Playlist Name
My Favourites
Playlist 01
Playlist 02
Playlist 03
Playlist 04
Playlist 05
Playlist 06
Playlist 07
Remove all tracks in the selected
playlist. Tracks themselves are not
deleted from the HDD.
Remove All
Tracks
Playlist 08
Playlist 09
Press [2, 1] to select “Remove”
and press [OK].
Please select playlist to add to.
OK
RETURN
Selected track is removed. Track itself
is not deleted from the HDD.
Remove
Press [2, 1] to select “Remove”
and press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
(> 76, Entering text)
Edit Playlist
Name
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9439
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying music to HDD
You can store the two formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.
1
While stopped
Music CD (CD-DA)
Insert a disc or USB memory.
When inserting music CDs, this unit makes access to the internal
Gracenote® Database to obtain title information. The album name,
track name and artist name are assigned automatically allowing you
find the track easily when playing back.
[CD] (Music CD)
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database and
searches for the title information.
MP3
P O W E R E D B Y
You can copy MP3 files from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD or USB
memory.
The track name and artist name will be displayed on this unit if the
information is contained in ID3 tag of the MP3 file.
About the Gracenote® Database
The Gracenote® Database is a database used to search and retrieve
music CD title information.
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
When a music CD is inserted, the unit will automatically search for
and obtain information about the inserted music CD.
The Gracenote® Database comes pre-installed on this unit, so titles
and artist information can be obtained.This unit has an internal
database containing information for approximately 350,000 album
titles.
If the title of the newly released music CD is not in the built-in
database, it is possible to acquire the title automatically by
connecting to the network via the Internet. (> 99)
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] (MP3) [USB]
The menu is automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )” and press
[OK].
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] (MP3) It will go to step 2 automatically if it is
only MP3 that is recorded.
e.g., [CD] (MP3) [USB]
If there are music CDs with very similar title information, then the
incorrect title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions are
found, it is displayed as “Unknown Artist”, “Unknown Album”.
In these cases, enter the music CD title information manually, after
recording to the HDD has completed.
CD
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Slect file type.
OK
RETURN
Copying music from a disc or a USB
memory
USB
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]> [HDD]
≥[CD] (Music CD): All tracks in the CD will be recorded.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (MP3) : All tracks in the folder will be recorded.
(Cannot record track-by-track.)
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
≥It will be recorded as 1 album to the HDD in 1 recording.
≥Audio quality
[CD] (Music CD): LPCM,
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (MP3): MP3
≥The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 40000
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that
can be recorded will be reduced.
2 Press the “Blue” button.
0.09
4.30
e.g., [CD] (Music CD)
Music View
CD
Track List
March Moon
Do this flower open?
Track Name
March Moon
Do this flower open?
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
No.
Artist
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
01
02
03
04
05
Playing track
If eastern wind has gone
Leon I
OK
OPTION
Slideshow
RETURN
Retry access
Copy All
to HDD
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
Recording starts.
To return to the previous screen in steps 1 to 3
Press [RETURN ].
To stop recording after step 3
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
If the menu screen (> above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
Press [3, 4] to select “DVD” and press [OK].
[USB]
Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].
[Note]
≥While recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer
recordings will not proceed.
≥Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc, USB
memory or SD card.
≥CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)
restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.
RQT9439
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)
Others
Convenient
functions
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using
“HDAVI Control” or Q Link.
What you can do with “HDAVI Control” and Q Link
(When the TV is on)
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?
Easy playback [VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that
offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV
(VIERA) or receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this
function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable.
See the operating instructions for connected equipment for
operational details.
≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions
provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI
CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we
have developed and added. As such, its operation with other
manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be
guaranteed.
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the
TV’s input will automatically switch to HDMI input mode
([VIERA]Link]) or AV input mode ([Q]Link]) and the TV displays the
corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2
,
[DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
(When the TV is off)
Power on link [VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the
TV will automatically turn on and displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
“HDAVI Control 4” is the newest standard (current as of
December, 2008) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible
equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s
conventional HDAVI equipment.
≥Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’
equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2
,
[DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
≥[DVD-V] [CD]
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.
Power off link [VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
Preparation
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also
automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically set to
standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is
displayed during playback or when the unit set to a timer recording.
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to
standby mode at the same time when recording, copying, finalising
etc.
1
Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable and a fully
wired 21-pin Scart cable (> 17), or to your receiver using an
HDMI cable (> 98).
2
3
Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (> 89). (The default setting is “On”.)
Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected
equipment (e.g., TV).
≥Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be
used as “HDAVI Control”.
Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select
this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI
Control” function works properly.
≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible
Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn
off.
4
Direct TV Recording [VIERA]Link]§3 [Q]Link]
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat
this procedure.
This function allows you to immediately start recording the
programme that you are viewing on the TV.
Press and hold [¥ DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.
Recording starts.
≥The titles are recorded to the HDD.
What is Q Link?
Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this
unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by connecting
the equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥This function does not work during EXT LINK standby or
recording.
Preparation
≥Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
(> 17).
Playing music continuously even after turning off
power to the television§4
For your reference
The following systems from other manufacturers have similar
function to Q Link from Panasonic.
For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or
consult your dealer.
≥Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)
≥DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz)
≥Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)
≥Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig)
≥SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)
(> 68, Playing music continuously even after turning off power to
the television)
§1
This button is available only when this unit is on.
When this button is pressed, the playback image is not
§2
immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible
to watch the contents from where playback started.
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback
started.
§3
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 3” or later.
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
§4
Control 2” or later.
[Note]
≥These functions may not work normally depending on the
equipment condition.
≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the
connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.
RQT9439
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy control only with VIERA remote
control
Using the OPTION menu window to operate this
unit [VIERA]Link]§1
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the
“Control Panel” (> below) and display the Top Menu for DVD-
Video.
If you connect this unit to the TV that has “HDAVI Control 2” or later
function with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient
functions.
You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the TV.
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.
Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate
this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
e,g.,
1 Press [OPTION].
Control Panel
[Note]
FUNCTION MENU
OPTION menu may be disabled when
operating the DVD-Video.
Aspect
Play Menu
≥The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press
incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.
Top Menu
2 Select an item then press [OK].
Menu
Drive Select
Using the FUNCTION MENU window to operate
OK
this unit [VIERA]Link]§1
RETURN
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
Control Panel
Switch to TV
Control Panel is displayed
(> below).
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window
Displayed when watching digital
satellite broadcasts with the tuner of
this unit. It will return to the TV
picture.
using the TV remote control.
≥If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV
remote control, and press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
FUNCTION MENU window is
displayed (> left).
≥About the FUNCTION MENU window (> 13).
Pause Live TV programme [VIERA]Link]§2
Aspect
Switch the screen mode
(
>
79).
You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume
later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you
have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
Multi Audio
Switch the signal 26).
(>
Sub Channel
Subtitle Language
Play Menu
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
Play Menu is displayed
(
>
78).
1 When you want to pause the TV programme
Top Menu [DVD-V]
Menu [DVD-V]
Drive Select
Top Menu is displayed (> 21).
Menu is displayed.
Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the
TV remote control.
≥This unit turns on automatically.
Select the HDD, DVD or SD drive
2 When you want to resume
Display the Control Panel (> right) and press
Rotate RIGHT (JPEG)
Rotate LEFT (JPEG)
Zoom in (JPEG)
Rotate the still picture (> 61).
[OK].
≥The TV programme resumes.
To stop Pause Live TV
1 Press [4] while the Control Panel is displayed.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Enlarge or shrink the still picture
(> 61).
Zoom out (JPEG)
TV Power Off
Play music continuously even after
turning off power to the television
(> 68).
[Note]
≥Subtitles are not displayed correctly if the setting for Subtitle
Character Set is different between this unit and the TV.
≥This function does not work with TV’s analogue broadcast
programmes during EXT LINK standby or recording.
Refer to other “Note” on page 75, “To pause the TV programme you
are watching—Pause Live TV”.
∫ Using the Control Panel
Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search
forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote control.
Perform steps 1 and 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to
operate this unit [VIERA]Link]§1” (> above).
The Control Panel is displayed (> below).
≥When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.
–[3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search
forward, [OK]: Play, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.
≥While playing still pictures
–[4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture,
[EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.
Control Panel
Exit
§1
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 2” or later.
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
§2
Control 3” or later.
∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only
this unit to standby mode
Press [Í] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.
∫ When not using “HDAVI Control”
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (> 89).
RQT9439
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying VIERA CASTTM
You can access a selection of Internet services from the Home
screen with VIERA CAST, for example YouTube, Picasa Web
Albums. (Current as of December 2009)
[Note]
≥If using slow Internet connection, the video may not be displayed
correctly. A high-speed Internet service with a speed of at least 6
Mbps is recommended.
≥Be sure to update the software (firmware) when a software
(firmware) update notice is displayed on the screen.
If the software (firmware) is not updated, you will not be able to use
the VIERA CASTTM function.
Preparation
≥Network connection (> 99)
≥Network Settings (> 92)
≥VIERA CASTTM Home screen is subject to change without notice.
≥The services through VIERA CASTTM are operated by their
respective service providers, and service may be discontinued
either temporarily or permanently without notice. Therefore,
Panasonic will make no warranty for the content or the continuity of
the services.
≥All features of websites or content of the service may not be
available.
≥Some content may be inappropriate for some viewers.
≥Some content may only be available for specific countries and may
be presented in specific languages.
1 Press [VIERA CAST].
Message is displayed. Please read these instructions
carefully and then press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item
and press [OK].
≥You can operate VIERA CAST using the following buttons
on the unit’s remote control. [3, 4, 2, 1], [OK],
[RETURN ], coloured buttons and numbered buttons.
≥If timer recording starts, VIERA CAST will stop.
VIERA CAST Home screen;
London, United Kingdom
Weather
COMING SOON
Setup
E
17
km/h
28°
TM
Web Albums
Panasonic Select
Featured Videos
COMING
SOON
COMING
SOON
Bloomberg
5min. delay
TELEVISION
XXX
XXX
XXX
7465.95
778.94 -9.47998
1442.82 -25.15
-89.68
Images are for illustration purpose, contents may
change without notice.
For details of VIERA CAST Home screen
Refer to a help item on the home screen.
To return to VIERA CAST Home screen
Press [VIERA CAST].
To exit from VIERA CAST
Press [EXIT].
≥Set the “Lock” to “On” to restrict using VIERA CAST. (> 90)
≥Set the “Automatic Volume Control” to “Off” when the audio is
warped while using the VIERA CAST. (> 90)
RQT9439
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pause Live TV
Operation during Pause Live TV
To pause the TV programme you are
watching—Pause Live TV
Press [6, 5].
Search
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s
tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is
useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
Press [;].
Pause
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
Quick View
Slow-motion
≥Press again to return to the normal speed.
While paused, press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
1
When you want to pause the TV programme while
watching TV
Press [;].
1 Press [∫].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Stop Pause
Live TV
HDD
PAUSE
Pause Live TV
[Note]
≥Temporary save is stopped in following cases.
–When save time exceeds 8 hours
–When save time exceeds 1 hour with no HDD free space
–When 2 programmes are recorded simultaneously
–When start time of a timer recording arrives§
≥The Pause Live TV function does not work
–The clock is not set.
2
When you want to resume
Press [1] (PLAY).
–While 2 programmes simultaneous recording
–While watching a programme being recorded
–When DV is selected
≥The programme is saved on the HDD in DR recording mode.
≥Programmes can be saved temporarily up to 8 hours on the
HDD. (This may vary depending on the HDD free space.)
–When a radio programme is selected
–During recording§
≥Titles that are copyright protected (Copying is prohibited) cannot
be viewed going back in time more than the allowed playback
period.
≥When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while
the screen is being displayed the screen saver is displayed [only
when the “Screen Saver” in Setup menu is set to “On” (> 88)]. To
return to the previous screen, press [RETURN ].
Only when “One cable” has been selected in Auto Setup (
§
>
18, 83).
DLNA feature
You can enjoy the video saved on the HDD of this unit on DLNA
compatible equipment connected via a network.
For details regarding connection and operation of equipment
connected via a network, refer to their respective operating
instructions.
Playing back from Panasonic DLNA
compatible equipment
1 Operate the playback equipment to
display the list of titles on this unit.
∫ Network connection (> 99)
≥For operation of the equipment, refer to their respective
∫ Register the DLNA compatible equipment to
this unit (> 93, Register the DLNA compatible
equipment to this unit)
operating instructions.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item
∫ Network Settings (> 90)
to playback (folder), and press [OK]
≥
Menu structure will be different depending on the equipment
connected to this unit. Select the contents by repeating the operation.
≥ Control Panel is displayed once the playback starts.
Operation can be performed with [3, 4, 2, 1], [OK], and
[EXIT].
[Note]
≥You cannot playback the titles on other DLNA compatible
equipment from this unit.
≥Still pictures, music, and copyright protected (Copying is
prohibited) titles cannot be played back.
≥Editing is not possible. (Only delete can be performed from
Panasonic equipment)
≥Programme being recorded cannot be played back.
≥Playback via DLNA compatible equipment cannot be done when
this unit is in the following conditions:
Control Panel
e.g.
Exit
– While simultaneously recording 2 programmes
– While playing back a disc
– While simultaneously performing High speed copy and recording
– While displaying the Setup menu
≥ Press [OK] if the Control Panel is not displayed.
– While executing functions using a network, such as "VIERA
CAST"
≥There may be some video that cannot be played back on DLNA
compatible equipment depending on the equipment.
≥You cannot playback simultaneously from 2 or more items of DLNA
compatible equipment.
≥Even with Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment, listing of titles
or playback method may be different.
In such cases, operate following the operating instructions of that
equipment, or following the instructions on the screen.
Playing back from non-Panasonic DLNA
compatible equipment
Select the title on this unit from the connected
equipment, and start the playback.
≥For operation of the equipment, refer to their respective operating
instructions.
RQT9439
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering text
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
The maximum number of characters:
character and press [OK].
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
[HDD] [RAM]
Characters
≥To delete a character
64 (44§)
36
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name
field and press [;]. (The selected characters are
deleted.)
Title
Album of still pictures
Album (Music) ([HDD])
Track ([HDD])
59
≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
59
e.g., entering the letter “R”
5
Artist ([HDD])
39
1 Press [7] to move to the
J
M7
K
N
Q
U
L
O
R
V
7th row.
2 Press [7] twice to highlight
“R”.
Playlist (Music) [HDD]
Disc ([RAM])
59
7
6
64
7
3 Press [OK].
P
S
7
8
§Title name for timer recording
3 Press [∫] (Set).
T
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Characters
“Writing...” appears then the
Title
Disc
44
40
screen returns to the Title view screen and so on.
To end partway
Press [RETURN ].
Text is not added.
[SD]
Characters
36
Album of still pictures
For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalisation or creating Top Menu (> 82). When entering a title
name, the name that will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed
in “Top Menu Preview” window.
[Note]
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
1 Show Enter Title Name screen.
Title (timer recording)
Standard Characters
Other Characters
Enter Title Name
Select “Input Name” in step 3 on page 33.
_
Chapter 1_
1
2
3
4
1
A
D
G
2
B
E
H
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
d
g
6
b
e
h
7
c
f
8
9
0
Top Menu Preview
Chapter 1
Title
*
Select “Enter Title Name” in step 4 on page 44.
/
%
i
$
&
Disc
Select “Disc Name” in step 1 of “Providing a name for a disc”
on page 80.
Album of still pictures ([HDD] [RAM] [SD])
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 4, “Editing still pictures
(JPEG)” on page 62.
Album (Music) ([HDD])
Select “Edit Album Name” in step 5 of “Editing music” on
page 69.
Track ([HDD])
Select “Edit Track Name” in step 5 of “Editing music” on page
69.
Artist ([HDD])
Select “Edit Artist Name” in step 5 of “Editing music” on page
69.
Playlist (Music) ([HDD])
Select “Edit Playlist Name” in step 5 of “Editing Playlist” on
page 70.
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Standard Characters
Other Characters
Enter Title Name
_
Press the “Red” button or
“Green” button to select
character type and press
[OK].
“Standard Characters”:
(> left, Alphabet characters,
etc.)
“Other Characters”:
(> below, Umlaut characters,
accented characters, etc.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
/
9
$
0
Top Menu Preview
*
d
g
j
%
h
k
i
[
&
@
_
Delete
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
]
Set
m
n
o
M
P
T
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
(
)
-
v
}
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
\
^
`
0
OK
RETURN
0
9
Space
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
¡
¢
¬
¶
£
-
¤
®
¸
¥
¦
§
±
»
¨
©
³
ª
´
«
µ
¯
¹
°
º
²
·
¼
Æ
Ð
½
Ç
Ñ
Û
å
¾
È
¿
É
Ó
Ý
ç
Á
Ë
Õ
ß
é
ó
ý
Â
Ì
Ã
Í
Ä
Î
À
Ê
Ô
Þ
è
Å
Ï
Ò
Ü
æ
ð
×
Ø
Ù
Ú
Ö
à
ê
ô
þ
á
ë
õ
ÿ
â
ì
ã
í
ä
î
ï
ñ
û
ò
ö
÷
ø
ú
ù
ü
0
Space
RQT9439
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenient functions to playback and viewing or listening
Subtitles§
Using on-screen menus
[DVD-V] [AVCHD]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (> below,
Language).
Common procedures
[HDD] [Except titles recorded in DR mode, or copied from high
definition video (AVCHD format)]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(Only discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
DivX
1 Press [DISPLAY].
Disc
Digital 2/0 ch
1
Soundtrack
Play
Off
Subtitles
Picture
L R
Audio Channel
Sound
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
≥Subtitle number is displayed even if there are not multiple
subtitles.
≥You can select “Text” in the subtitle number while playing back
a DivX video file containing DivX subtitle text. DivX subtitles
text is displayed as a closed caption by selecting “Text”.
Other
Menu
Item
Setting
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
≥The menu is not displayed when playing still pictures.
Multi Audio [HDD] [Titles recorded in DR mode, or copied from high
2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
definition video (AVCHD format)]
Switch in the case of multiple audio.
press [1].
Subtitle Language [HDD] [Titles recorded in DR mode, or copied
from high definition video (AVCHD format)]
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [1].
Select the subtitle language in the case of multiple languages.
Angle§ [DVD-V] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.
≥Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].
Change the number to select an angle.
Audio Channel [HDD] (Titles in recording mode other than DR)
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›] and DivX
(> 38, Changing audio during play)
§
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using
the menus (> 21) on the disc.
Video [AVCHD]
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
change when there is no recording.
The video recording method appears
Soundtrack§
Audio attribute
[HDD] [Except titles recorded in DR mode, or copied from high
definition video (AVCHD format)]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear (> right, Audio attribute).
[DVD-V] [AVCHD]
Signal type
LPCM/ Digital/ Digital+/
DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Number of channels
Select the audio and language (> right, Audio attribute,
Language
Language).
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
DAN: Danish
THA: Thai
DivX
POR: Portuguese
RUS: Russian
JPN: Japanese
CHI: Chinese
KOR: Korean
POL: Polish
CES: Czech
SLK: Slovak
HUN: Hungarian
FIN: Finnish
Select the soundtrack number.
Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one
audio type.
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
MAL: Malay
VIE: Vietnamese
¢:
Others
RQT9439
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenient functions to playback and viewing or listening
Play menu—Change the play sequence
Sound menu—Change the sound effect
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
Sound Effects
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[CD] [USB] [AVCHD]
Repeat Play
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[CD] [USB] [AVCHD]
≥Re-master 1
≥Re-master 2
(Discs record at 48 kHz or less)
This feature gives you a more natural sound by adding higher
frequency signals not recorded on the track.
Items displayed depends on the contents of the playback.
≥All
≥Playlist
≥Title
≥Chapter
≥Track
≥This function is effective for audio from the HDMI terminal or
the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal only when “Dolby Digital/
Dolby Digital Plus”, “DTS” or “MPEG” is set to “PCM” (> 87).
(However, in this case, audio is output as 2ch from the
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.)
Select “Off” to cancel.
Random (Only when playing music)
[HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
While playing, press [3, 4] to select “On”.
Dialogue Enhancer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[AVCHD] and DivX
(3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
Picture menu—Change the picture quality
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.
Mode
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[AVCHD]
Other menu—Change the display position
Select the picture quality mode during play.
Position
≥Normal:
≥Soft:
Default setting
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[CD] [USB] [SD] [AVCHD] and DivX
Soft picture with fewer video artifacts
Details are sharper
≥Fine:
Change where this menu screen appears on your TV.
≥Cinema:
Mellows movies, enhances detail in dark
scenes. (This does not affect the titles in DR
mode.)
HD optimizer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[AVCHD] and DivX
It will compensate the mosaic noise in the video and haze
around the characters precisely.
Progressive§
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (> 114, Film and video).
≥Auto:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
≥Video:
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
≥Film:
Select this if the edges of
the film content appear
jagged or rough when
“Auto” is selected.
However, if the video
content is distorted as
shown in the illustration
to the right, then select “Auto”.
§
It will work when “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup menu is “Off”
(> 89) and “Component Resolution” in the Setup menu is “576p/
480p” (> 90) and playing [DVD-V].
RQT9439
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status messages
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen
Status of this unit during recording or playback can be displayed with
the following operation.
The status message will differ depending on the media or status of
this unit.
When black bars are shown at the top, bottom, left, and right sides of
the screen, you can enlarge the image to fill the screen.
1 Press [OPTION].
Press [STATUS ].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Aspect” and
The display changes each time you press the button.
press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select the item.
≥Normal:
Normal output
≥Side cut:
The black bars on the right and left sides of the 16:9 image
disappear and the image is enlarged. Please note that the
right and left sides of the image are cut off when the black
bar is not displayed.
A Status of this unit is displayed.
e.g.,
H
REC
DD
Display as frame
on the 4:3 aspect
ratio TV screen§
Enlarged display
with black bar
erased with Side
cut
ZDF
3
KiKa REC2
16:9 image with
black bars on the
right and left
1 Selected drive status/type of disc or USB memory
2 Recording status/the remaining time/play status
3
Channel
4 The name of the station
5 Recording in background/copy progress indicator (When
recording 2 programmes simultaneously.)
Enlarged display
with black bar
erased with Side
cut
Displayed with black
bars on right and left
on the 16:9 aspect
ratio TV screen
B Detailed status of this unit is displayed.
e.g.,
18:53:50 11.11.2009
§
Only when “TV Aspect” (> 88) is set to “Letterbox”.
Remain
HDD 45:53 DR
T1 0:05.14 XP
1
T2 0:10.10 DR
≥Zoom:
2
T3 0:00.10 DR
The black bars on the top and bottom sides of the 4:3 image
disappear and the image is enlarged. Please note that the
top and bottom sides of the image are cut off when the black
bar is not displayed.
0:35.32
≥When using Pause Live TV
18:53:50 11.11.2009
Live 18:53.50
4:3 image with
black bars at the
top and bottom
Displayed as frame
on the 16:9 aspect
ratio TV screen
Enlarged display
with black bar
erased with
Zoom
Play 18:40.12
1 Date and time
2 Available recording time and recording mode
3 Title number and elapsed time during play and recording mode
4 Title number and elapsed time during recording and recording
4 Press [OK].
mode
[Note]
5 Current play position
6 Total time
≥The screen mode is switched to “Normal” in the following
situations:
7 Current time
–when you change channel
–when you start or end the playback of a title
–when the unit is turned off or on.
8 The time when the picture currently displayed on the television
was broadcasted
≥[DVD-V] “Side cut” does not have any effect.
≥When “TV Aspect” (> 88) is set to “Pan & Scan” or “Letterbox”, the
“Zoom” effect is disabled.
C Status of the broadcast being received is displayed. (> 26)
All DVB Channels
12:55
1 ZDF
Bruder
0:50 - 2:30
Change category
For info press
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Now
MULTI
/
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9439
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc and card management
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[SD]
Setting the protection
[RAM]
Common procedures
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc
2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVD” or “SD
Protection” and press [OK].
Card” and press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Play all Video
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
High Definition
press [OK].
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music
e.g., [RAM]
DVD Management
DVD-RAM
Files
1
Titles 11
TV Guide
Copy
DVD-RAM
Play Video
Playlists
Play Pictures
DVD Management
Time Remaining 5:38 EP Used 0 : 22
View
(
JPEG
)
Others
DVD
SD Card
USB
Disc Name
SD
Select for playback of disc and formatting of disc etc.
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Format Disc
On
OK
RETURN
OK
RETURN
3 Press [3, 4] to select “DVD
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-
protected.
Management” or “Card Management”
and press [OK].
e.g., [RAM]
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
DVD Management
DVD-RAM
Files
1
Titles 11
Time Remaining 5:38 EP Used 0 : 22
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Disc Name
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Format Disc
Off
Cartridge-protection
OK
RETURN
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge
PROTECT
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Providing a name for a disc
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can provide a name for each disc.
Preparation
≥[RAM] Release protection (> above, Setting the protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”
and press [OK].
(> 76, Entering text)
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment after creating top menu.
DVD Management
DVD-RAM
Files
1
Titles
1
0
My favourite
01
01/02
Time Remaining 5:38 EP Used
02
Chapter
1
Chapter
2
My favourite
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9439
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting all titles—Delete all titles
[RAM]
Enabling the unit’s recording function—
Format
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
[SD]
Preparation
≥Release protection (> 80, Setting the protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (> 80, Common procedures)
Preparation
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (> 11, 80, Setting the protection).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all
[Note]
titles” and press [OK].
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data), and
they cannot be restored. Check carefully before proceeding.
The contents are deleted when you format a disc or card even if
you have set protection.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
After performing steps 1–3 (> 80, Common procedures)
press [OK].
1 Press [3, 4] to select, “Format Disc”
A message appears when finished.
or “Format Card” and press [OK].
4 Press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
[Note]
A message appears when formatting is finished.
[Note]
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc or the card unusable.
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Still picture data (JPEG) or computer data cannot be deleted.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
4 Press [OK].
[Note]
≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.
≥[-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›] You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video
format on this unit.
≥[HDD] Perform “Format HDD” in the Setup menu (> 86).
To stop formatting [RAM]
Press [RETURN ].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9439
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc and card management
[Note]
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately
four times longer).
Selecting the background style—Top
Menu
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
The background selected here will be displayed as the DVD-Video
top menu after finalising or Create Top Menu ([+RW]).
After finalising
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you can
no longer record or edit.
≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
(> 81) although it becomes play-only after finalising.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 80, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”
and press [OK].
≥You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] If you finalise discs recorded on
Panasonic equipment other than this unit, the background selected
as “Top Menu” may not be displayed.
≥Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
background and press [OK].
Top Menu List
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
[+RW]
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW
disc on other equipment.
1
2
3
Display after finalising
01
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
Title Name
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (> 45,
Change Thumbnail)
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (> left)
before creating top menu.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 80, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top
Menu” and press [OK].
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu
first—Auto-Play Select
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising or
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
creating Top Menu ([+RW]).
press [OK].
After performing steps 1–3 (> 80, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play
Select” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
“Title 1” and press [OK].
4 Press [OK].
[Note]
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
Title 1:
The disc content is played without displaying
the top menu.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Finalising—Finalise
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
You can play these discs on compatible DVD players by finalising it
on the unit, effectively making it into DVD-Video that complies with
DVD-Video standards. Before finalising, select the background on
the “Top Menu” (> above). The menu you create with the unit can
also be used on most DVD players.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 80, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and
press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
A message appears when finalising is finished.
[Note]
≥You cannot cancel finalising.
≥Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.
This will render the disc unusable.
4 Press [OK].
RQT9439
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.
≥The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
To delete channels on a Favourite
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column and
press [OK].
Common procedures
≥Repeat this step to delete other channels.
≥Press the “Yellow” button to delete all the channels from the
Favourite.
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3 Press [RETURN ].
4 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
Deleting a channel from a Favourite does not affect the channel
itself. You can still select the channel from the “All DVB
Channels”.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
To change the name of a Favourite in the
“Favourite” column
press [OK].
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press the “Red” button.
Setup
DVB Tuning
HDD / Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Network Settings
Others
≥User input screen appear.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a character and press [OK].
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
≥To delete a character
Press the “Red” button.
≥To delete all characters
Press the “Blue” button.
4 Press [RETURN ] to save the Favourite.
OK
RETURN
§
When the station name of the “All DVB Channels” column is
4 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
highlighted
press [OK].
∫ Channel List
You can edit the Channel List to change the channel skip setting or
channel number assignments to make tuning simpler.
5 Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [OK].
All DVB Channels
Sorting 123...
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ZDF
3sat
KiKa
ZDFinfokanal
ZDFdokukanal
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
option and press [OK].
≥Follow the instruction on the screen if the operation method
is different.
ZDFtheaterkanal
DKULTUR
Select
Hide
RETURN
To return to the previous screen
Category
Move
Reveal all
123/ABC
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
To skip unwanted channels
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All DVB Channels”.
≥Press the “Red” button to select the “Category”.
≥Press the “Blue” button to change the sorting mode.
2 Press [OK].
DVB Tuning
≥The check mark is removed.
≥To clear the skip setting, press [OK] again.
≥To clear the all skip setting, press “Yellow” button.
∫ Favourites Edit
You can create four Favourites of channels for viewing and
recording easier. Editing these Favourites does not affect the
channel setting itself.
≥Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourites
during timer recording standby.
To change the channel number assignment
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All DVB Channels” and
press the “Green” button.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel number you wish to reassign.
3 Press [OK].
Press the “Green” button to select the Favourite to edit.
≥If another channel is already assigned to the channel number
you wish to use, the two channels will be switched.
Favourites Editor
All DVB Channels
Sorting 123...
Favourites 1
1
ZDF
2
3
3sat
KiKa
4
5
6
7
8
ZDFinfokanal
ZDFdokukanal
ZDFtheaterkanal
DKULTUR
DLF
∫ Auto Setup
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (> 18) fails for some
reason.
Select channel
Add
Press [3, 4] to select the Auto Setup method.
RETURN
Select category
Select favourites
Add all
123/ABC
≥Search by selected satellite
Satellite is selected and transponders are searched for channels.
To add channels to a Favourite
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All DVB Channels”
column and press [OK].
≥Search all satellites
All satellites and transponders are searched for channels.
When the confirmation screen appears
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥Repeat this step to add other channels.
≥Press the “Red” button to select the Category.
≥Press the “Blue” button to change the sorting mode.
≥Press the “Yellow” button to add all the available channels to
the Favourite. (This function is available only when no channels
have been added to the Favourite.)
≥When restarting the auto tuning using the main unit’s buttons
(> 110, To reset this unit)
2 Press [RETURN ].
3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
To change the order of channels of a Favourite
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column to
move and press the “Green” button.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the channel and press
the “Green” button.
≥Repeat the steps 2 – 3 to move other channels.
4 Press [RETURN ].
5 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
RQT9439
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Signal Input
∫ Manual Tuning
You can add each new channels manually that the Auto Setup could
not complete successfully.
Press [2, 1] to select the terminal for which you wish to display the
signal condition.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to set.
Signal Quality
≥Below 2 (display red):
Transponder Frequency
The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the
pictures and sound.
≥2–5 (display orange):
The signal quality is basically adequate, but brief interference in
the pictures and sound is possible in isolated case.
≥Over 5 (display green):
Enter value with numbered buttons.
Symbol Rate
Press [2, 1] to select the auto and manual input of symbol
rate method.
≥Data flow transmission rate from the satellite to the dish.
Optimum picture and sound quality.
Polarisation
Press [2, 1] to select the Polarisation method.
≥Polarisation indicates whether the transponder transmits the
satellite signal horizontally or vertically.
Signal Strength
The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength is
0%, “10” means signal strength is 100%.
If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.
Reduce the signal amplification at your satellite dish.
≥When the signal is weak:
Modulation
Press [2, 1] to select the Modulation method.
Service ID
– adjust the position and direction of the dish.
– check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
Press [2, 1] to select the Service ID method.
2 Press [OK] to start scan.
Satellite
Satellite name is displayed.
The set channel is displayed in the table.
3 Press [EXIT] and press [W X CH] to check that applicable
channels have been selected.
Parameter
Physical channel and frequency is displayed.
∫ Update Channel List
∫ Antenna System
You can update the satellite digital channels to receive to the latest
one.
You can receive several satellites if you have DiSEqC control
antenna system.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Update Channel List” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the method and press [2, 1] to select
settings.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Antenna System”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select antenna system and press [OK].
[One LNB]
Compatible with Single LNB
≥Satellite
Satellite name is displayed.
[MiniDiSEqC] Up to 2 LNBs can be controlled.
[DiSEqC1.0] Up to 4 LNBs can be controlled.
≥This unit supports DiSEqC Version 1.0.
≥Search Mode
All Channels:
Search for all channels.
Free Channels:
Search for free channels only.
∫ LNB Configuration
LNB
≥If you set to “One LNB” in “Antenna System”.
≥Scan Mode
Quick:
Not selectable.
In this mode, scanning takes place in a short period of time.
≥If you set to “MiniDiSEqC” in “Antenna System”.
Full:
In this mode, the scanning is thorough but takes more time.
[AA]
≥If you set to “DiSEqC1.0” in “Antenna System”.
[AA] [AB] [BA]
[AB]
3 Press [OK].
The unit starts searching for newly available satellite digital
channels.
[BB]
LNB Low Band Frequency (MHz)
LNB High Band Frequency (MHz)
Satellite
Update Channel List
Satellite
Astra 19.2° E
Progress
0%
100%
Quality
This will take about 10 minutes.
No.
Channel Name
Type
Set the connected satellite for the selected LNB.
[No Satellite]
[Astra 28.2°E]
[Astra 19.2°E]
[Eutelsat 10°E]
[Sirius 5°E]
[Turksat 42°E]
[Arabsat 26°E]
[Eutelsat 16°E]
[Eurobird 9°E]
[Intelsat 1°W]
[Atl. Bird 7°W]
[User defined]
[Hellas 39°E]
[Astra 23.5°E]
[Hot Bird 13°E]
[Eutelsat 7°E]
[Amos 4°W]
Free TV:0
Pay TV:0
Radio:0
Searching
RETURN
“Finished” is displayed when the search is finished.
[Atl. Bird 5°W]
[Hispasat 30°W]
[Atl. Bird 8°W]
4 Press [RETURN ] to save the newly found channels.
∫ Signal Condition
≥If you do not know the connected satellite, select “No Satellite”.
(Available satellite will be searched in Auto Setup.)
≥If you select “User defined”, set “Test Transponder Frequency”
manually.
You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.
Check the satellite dish if you are receiving a poor signal.
When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be
selected:
Test Transponder Frequency
1
2
3
Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select “TV”.
Display the Setup menu again (> 83, Common procedures).
The quality and strength of the signal are shown.
Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
Signal Condition
Signal Input
Channel Name
Signal Quality
Signal Strength
Satellite
LNB in 1
1 ZDF
0
0
10
10
Astra 19.2° E
Parameter
11836MHz, H, 27497kS/s
Channel Up
Channel Down
CH
Change Input
RETURN
RQT9439
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ Preferred Language
DVD-Video Ratings
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
1 Press [3, 4] to select the item.
(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Ratings” is
displayed.)
2 Press [2, 1] to select the language or item.
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the
numbered buttons when the PIN setting screen is shown. It will be
the common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings” and “Lock” of “Internet
Content Settings”.
Do not forget your PIN.
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
You can select up to 2 different subtitles, audio tracks and teletext to
be used when multi audio, subtitles and teletext digital broadcasts
are received. Select the order of priority.
If the selected language is not available, then the original language
will be selected.
Multi Audio
Multi Audio ( alternative )
[8 No Limit]
[1 to 7]
All DVD-Video can be played.
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
Subtitles
Subtitles ( alternative )
[0 Lock All]
Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
Teletext Character Set
≥Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
[West]
[East 1]
[East 2]
[Unlock Recorder]
[Temporary Unlock]
[Change Level]
Teletext
[English]
[Spanish]
[Danish]
[Polish]
[German]
[Portuguese]
[Swedish]
[Basque]
[Czech]
[French]
[Italian]
[Dutch]
DivX Subtitle Text
[Turkish]
Select a suitable item according to the language used for DivX
subtitles text (> 43).
≥This item is displayed only when pressing [DISPLAY] after
playing back a file.
[Finnish]
[Catalan]
[Greek]
[Norwegian]
[Corsican]
[Luxembourgish]
[Estonian]
[Galician]
[Slovak]
[Latin 1]
[Latin 2]
[Cyrillic]
English, German, Spanish, etc.
Polish, Czech, Hungarian, etc.
Russian, etc.
[Croatian]
[Original]
[Slovenian]
[Lithuanian]
≥The default language is the language setting selected when
making the initial settings.
§ [Other ¢¢¢¢]
Enter a code (> 100) with the numbered buttons.
When the selected language is not available on the disc, the
default language is played. There are discs where you can only
switch the language from the menu screen (> 21).
Preferred Subtitle Type
[Standard]
[DVD-V]
[Hard of
Hearing]
Display subtitles for people who are hard of
hearing.
Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.
≥Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you
make here.
HDD / Disc
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Settings for Playback
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Soundtrack
(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Soundtrack for
DVD-Video” is displayed.)
[English]
[Spanish]
[Original]
[German]
[Dutch]
[French]
[Italian]
[Swedish]
The original language of each disc will be
selected.
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
≥The default language is the language setting selected when
making the initial settings.
Subtitles
(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Subtitles for
DVD-Video” is displayed.)
[Automatic]
If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
available, subtitles of that language will
automatically appear if available on that disc.
[English]
[German]
[Dutch]
[French]
[Italian]
[Spanish]
[Swedish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
Menu
(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Menu for DVD-
Video” is displayed.)
[English]
[German]
[Dutch]
[French]
[Italian]
[Spanish]
[Swedish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
≥The default language is the language setting selected when
making the initial settings.
RQT9439
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Settings for Recording
HDD Management
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
≥Press and hold [OK] for 3 seconds to show the following settings.
Recording time in EP mode
Delete all titles
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode
(> 29, Recording modes and approximate recording times).
Delete all titles.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
[6 hours]
You can record for 6 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
Format HDD
Format of the HDD is performed.
[8 hours]
You can record for 8 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
Formatting deletes all contents, and they cannot be restored.
Check carefully before proceeding.
≥The sound quality is better when using “6 hours” than when
using “8 hours”.
Picture
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Aspect for Recording
Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying in HG, HX, HE,
HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode.
Still Mode
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (> 114,
[Automatic] The title will be recorded with the original aspect
ratio at the time when recording started (including
when recording started at a commercial, etc.).
Frames and fields).
[Automatic]
[Field]
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is
selected. (The picture is coarser.)
[16:9]
[4:3]
[Frame]
Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture
is clearer and finer.)
≥In the following case, the programme will be recorded with the
original aspect ratio.
–[HDD] [RAM] When the recording mode is set to “XP”, “SP”,
“LP”, “EP” or “FR” with the “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to
“Off”
≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
–When recording to a +R, +R DL and +RW.
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
≥It is not valid for titles in DR mode or AVCHD videos.
[On] The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does
not work when there are several audio types included on
the playlist and when using Quick View (PLAYa1.3).
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may
change slightly.
Chapter Creation
Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. (> 47)
[Automatic]
[Off]
[5 minutes]
[Off] The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
No chapter start points are set.
NTSC Video Output
Rec for High Speed Copy
Select how the NTSC image is output.
You can copy titles recorded in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode from
the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW using high speed mode. However, screen
size, etc. is restricted (> below).
[NTSC] Output as NTSC.
[PAL60] Convert and output as PAL60.
Select this when connected to the PAL format TV.
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.
This setting is valid for the following cases:
–Recording from an external equipment (including DV
equipment)
–Copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.
[On]
You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press
[2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The following restrictions are applied to recorded
titles.
– Recordings are made using the aspect ratio set
in “Aspect for Recording” (> above).
– Select the type of audio in advance from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 87).
– You are no longer able to switch the audio when
watching a programme on an input channel on
the TV connected to this unit.
[Off]
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed
copy compatible discs).
[Maximum]
[Normal
( Silent )]
The noise generated by this unit is less than when
“Maximum” is selected, however the time required
for copying will double (approximately).
Start Recording Time
This function sets the timer recording to start earlier than the TV
Guide time.
[1 min earlier]
[10 min earlier]
[3 min earlier]
[Off]
[5 min earlier]
Finish Recording Time
This function sets the timer recording to stop later than the TV
Guide time.
[1 min later]
[3 min later]
[Off]
[5 min later]
[10 min later]
RQT9439
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound
Digital Audio Output
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
PCM Down Conversion
Dynamic Range Compression
[DVD-V]
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.
It will be converted to 48 kHz regardless of the setting in following
cases.
≥The signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz.
≥The disc has copy protection.
[On]
[Off]
Downmix
Switch the downmix system for playing back multi-channel
surround sound.
≥When “Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Plus”, “DTS” and “MPEG” is set
to “Bitstream”, there are no downmix effects for the outputted
audio.
≥The audio output will be in “Stereo” in the following cases.
– AVCHD playback
[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment cannot process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
[Off] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment can process signals with a sampling
frequency of 96 kHz.)
Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Plus§
1
[Stereo]
When connected to equipment that does not
support the virtual surround function.
DTS§
2
MPEG§
1
[Surround
encoded]
When connected to equipment that supports the
virtual surround function
Select to output Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS Digital
Surround, or MPEG as bitstream or PCM.
Bilingual Audio Selection
[Note]
(Only when recording from DV input)
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:
≥Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+RW.
≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
≥If the unit is connected with the HDMI AV OUT terminal, the
specifications of the connected equipment take preference over
this unit and audio selected in these items may not be output
(e.g., when a television is connected, the HDMI audio output of
this unit is limited to down-mixed 2ch.)
≥“Rec for High Speed Copy” is enabled. (> 86)
≥Recording sound in LPCM (> 88, “Audio Mode for XP
Recording”).
[Bitstream]
Select “Bitstream” when the connected equipment
can decode the respective audio format.
[M 1]
[M 2]
≥You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.
≥When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (> 88).
[PCM]
Select “PCM” when the connected equipment
cannot decode the respective audio format.
Refer to the operating instructions for connected
devices to verify whether or not they can decode
each of the audio formats.
Set the speaker output on the amplifier when
output with PCM.
§1
The default setting is “PCM”.
The default setting is “Bitstream”.
§2
RQT9439
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Audio Mode for XP Recording
Screen Saver
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.
This is to prevent burn-in on the screen.
≥When this is set to “On”, the masked-off area on the screen
becomes grey.
[Dolby Digital] (> 114)
[LPCM] (> 115)
≥The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of
normal XP mode recordings.
≥The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
≥When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 87).
[Only when connecting with an HDMI cable or a component video
cable and “HDMI Video Format” (> 89) is set to any other mode
than “576p/480p”, or “Component Resolution” (> 90) is set to
“720p” or “1080i”]
[On]
If there is no operation for a while or more, the
displayed screen switches to the other states
automatically.
Audio Mode for DV Input
–When the DIRECT NAVIGATOR, TV Guide,
Timer recording list, Copying list or
FUNCTION MENU, etc. is displayed, the screen
saver is not displayed.
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV
input terminal (> 56).
[Stereo 1] Records audio (L1, R1).
–When Music is played, the display returns to the
screen saver mode. (Playback continues.)
–When still pictures are shown (except for
slideshows), the display returns to the Picture
View screen.
–The display returns to the screen saver mode
when it is paused by the Pause Live TV. (Pause
status will continue.)
[Stereo 2] Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
[Mix]
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
≥When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 87).
Audio Channels for HG / HX / HE / HL Recording
This will set the audio when converting the recording mode to “HG”,
“HX”, “HE”, or “HL” mode (> 46).
[Off]
Teletext
Select the Teletext display mode. (> 27)
[5.1-channel]§
Record using 5.1 ch audio
Record using 2 ch audio.
[TOP (FLOF)]
When switching Teletext display mode to
either TOP mode or FLOF (FASTEXT)
mode.
[2-channel]
§
If the audio sampling frequency is not 48 kHz, surround audio is
mixed and recorded in front LR channels. Audio will be output
from two front speakers only, even if you play it on 5.1 ch
speaker connection.
[List]
When switching Teletext display mode to
List mode.
Connection
Display
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be
shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may
not be able to change the settings.
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Language
Choose the language for these menus and on-screen messages.
TV Aspect
[Deutsch]
[English]
[Français]
[Italiano]
Set to match the type of television connected.
≥The default language is the language setting selected when
making the initial settings.
[16:9]
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.
[Pan & Scan] When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, side picture is trimmed for
16:9 picture.
On-Screen Messages
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information
screen (> 26) disappears automatically.
This setting may not work and the
pictures may be shown in the
letterbox style depending on the
content.
The length of time the Control Panel (> 73) is displayed can also
be changed, but “Off” does not work.
[Off] (The digital channel information is not displayed.)
[Letterbox]
When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television. 16:9 picture is shown in
the letterbox style.
[3 sec.]
[5 sec.]
[7 sec.]
[10 sec.]
Unit’s Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save” (> 91)
Aspect for 4:3 Video
to “On”.
To play a 4:3 title, set how to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen
television.
[Bright]
[Dim]
[4:3]
Picture output expands left or right.
[Automatic]
The display turns dark during play and disappears
when the unit is turned off. It reappears momentarily
if a button is pressed. While using this mode, the
standby power consumption can be reduced.
[16:9] Picture is output as original aspect with side
panels.
RQT9439
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV System
HDMI Connection
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting
with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles
on the HDD
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
HDMI Video Mode
Select “On” when video is output from HDMI AV OUT terminal.
[PAL]
≥Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television.
[On]
≥Select to record television programmes and PAL input
from other equipment.
≥Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the
HDD.
[Off]
When the equipment such as amplifiers is connected
using HDMI cable, and TV is connected to the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal (setup before
connecting to the amplifiers.)
[NTSC] ≥Select when connecting to a NTSC television.
Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.
≥Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
≥Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded on the
HDD.
HDMI Video Format
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.
However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may
be improved by changing the setting.
≥To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need to
connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this unit is
connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must also be
1080p compatible.
[Note]
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
[576p/480p]
≥
If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be used.
[720p]
[1080i]
[1080p]
All images other than 720p will be output as 1080i.
≥A disc or title with different “TV System” may not be able to
playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording.
You will be able to playback by changing the “TV System” settings
in that case, but to prevent failure of the timer recording, change
back the settings before the recording starts.
When outputting 1080p signal, we recommend
using High Speed HDMI Cables that have the
HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are less
than 5.0 meters to prevent video distortion etc.
To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)
While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
[Automatic] Automatically selects the output resolution best
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,
720p or 576p/480p).
∫ Types of disc or title recorded on HDD for the
type of connected TV
≥Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY) for more than 5 seconds
when the image is disturbed by changing the setting. It will be
set to “576p/480p”.
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)
HDMI Audio Output
[On]
TV type
Disc/Titles recorded on HDD
Yes/No
[Off]
When connected to TV with HDMI cable, and connected
to amplifiers not compatible to HDMI with a DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT terminal
Multi-system
TV
PAL
NTSC
PAL
≤
≤
PAL TV
≤
VIERA Link
NTSC
PAL
≤
§1 (PAL60)
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an
HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.
NTSC TV
–
[On]
§2
NTSC
≤
[Off]
Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.
§1
Select “PAL60” for “NTSC Video Output” in the Setup menu
(> 86). If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60
signals the picture will not be shown correctly.
Select “NTSC” in “TV System”.
§2
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD ensure that you
match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or NTSC).
RQT9439
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Component Resolution
Network Settings
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
This sets the video output resolution when using the component
video terminal.
[576i/480i]
[576p/480p]
[720p]
[1080i]
IP Address / DNS Settings (> 92)
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
≥You cannot change the setting while the “HDMI Video Mode” is
set to “On”. Set the “HDMI Video Mode” to “Off” and set the “AV1
Output” to “Video ( with component )” or “S Video ( with
component )”.
≥If it is set to “720p”, images other than “720p” will be output as
“1080i”.
≥The video output resolution will be restricted to “576p/480p” even
if you select “720p” or “1080i” when viewing or recording the
following images:
Connection Test
IP Address Auto-assignment
[On]
[Off]
IP Address
–Some programmes in the HD format
–DVD-Video discs
Subnet Mask
–DivX
Gateway Address
DNS-IP Auto-assignment
–Images input via AV1, AV2 or DV input
≥Press the [∫] and [1] (PLAY) for more than 5 seconds when the
image is disturbed by changing the setting. It will be set to “576i/
480i”.
[On]
[Off]
AV1 Output
Primary DNS
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.
Select “Video ( with component )” or “S Video ( with component )”
for component output (progressive output).
If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select
“RGB 1 ( without component )” or “RGB 2 ( without component )”.
When a decoder is connected, do not set to “RGB 1 ( without
component )”.
Secondary DNS
Connection Speed Auto-configure
[On]
[Off]
Connection Speed Setting
This is enabled only when “Connection Speed Auto-configure” is
turned “Off”.
[Video ( with component )]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.
[S Video ( with component )]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video
signal.
[10BASE half duplex]
[100BASE half duplex]
[10BASE full duplex]
[100BASE full duplex]
[RGB 1 ( without component )]
Proxy Server Settings (> 93)
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal. If
you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch
to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Initialize
[RGB 2 ( without component )]
Set the setting of the “Proxy Server Settings” back.
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal. If
you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only
when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
Proxy Address
(The initial setting is blank.)
AV2 Settings
Proxy Port Number
Set to match the connected equipment.
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
(The initial setting is “0”.)
AV2 Input
Connection Test
Set to “RGB / Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording RGB
output from external equipment.
Internet Content Settings (> 93)
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
[RGB / Video] [RGB]
[Video]
[S Video]
Lock
Ext Link
You can restrict using VIERA CAST.
This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the
numbered buttons when the PIN setting screen is shown. It will be
the common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings” and “Lock”.
Do not forget your PIN.
“NTSC” (> 89).
[Ext Link 1]
When a Set Top Box etc. which transmits a special
control signal recordings via the 21-pin Scart cable
is connected.
[On]
[Off]
Start and stop timings of recording are controlled
by the control signal.
Automatic Volume Control
[Ext Link 2]
When external equipment with a timer function is
connected.
[On]
When it turns on, recording starts.
When it turns off, recording stops.
[Off]
Select “Off” when the audio is warped while
using VIERA CAST.
Common Interface
Access to software contained on Common Interface (CI) modules.
(> 16, 19) Follow the on-screen instructions.
Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings (> 93)
You will be able to access this unit from Panasonic DLNA
compatible equipment on the network by registering them to this
unit.
It is also possible to change the name of this unit on the network.
Server ( DLNA ) Settings (> 93)
By allowing access from non-Panasonic DLNA compatible
equipment on the network, it allows them to access this unit.
RQT9439
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PIN Entry
Others
This PIN will be used for following controlling
–DVD-Video playback
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
–Using VIERA CAST
Automatic Standby
≥Make a note of PIN in case you forget it.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the number, then press [1].
≥You can also use the numbered buttons.
2 Repeat step 1 for enter 4-digit PIN.
3 Press [OK] to confirm.
Select how long the unit remains on when it is not being used.
[2 hours]
[4 hours]
[6 hours]
[Off]
Remote Control
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products
close together.
PIN Entry
Remember the PIN.
[DVD 1]
[DVD 2]
[DVD 3]
0
0
0
0
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
OK
1 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or
“DVD 3”) and press [OK].
Power Save
To change the code on the remote control
2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button
([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.
3 Press [OK].
[On]
Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned to
standby (> 111).
[Off]
It is possible to start quickly from standby mode.
∫ When the following indicator appears on the
≥“Unit’s Display” (> 88) is fixed with “Automatic” when “Power
Save” is set to “On”, and is changed to “Bright” when “Power
Save” is set to “Off”.
≥This function cannot be enabled when the DLNA function is
enabled in "Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings" or "Server ( DLNA )
Settings". (> 90)
unit’s display
The unit’s remote control code
System Update (> 94)
In order to update this unit’s software (firmware) and to support
system changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically
performs software (firmware) updates.
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
(> step 2).
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
[Note]
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main
unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(> step 2).
Software Update in Standby
[0:00 to 23:00]§
When you set this unit to standby mode,
software (firmware) updates and TV Guide
data are downloaded automatically at the
specified time.
Clock
This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital
broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a day.
However, if the time is not set correctly, use the settings listed in the
method below.
[Off]
§ Default setting is “3:00”.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press [OK].
Software Licence
Time Zone > below
Information about the software licence is displayed.
Clock
DivX Registration
Automatic
Off
Time Zone
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video-
on-Demand (VOD) content (> 43).
Automatic
Time
Date
27
15
45
39
5
2009
Initialize
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Please set the clock.
OK: access RETURN: leave
OK
RETURN
Shipping Condition
All the settings except for the ratings level and ratings PIN return
to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled.
When you select “Off”
2 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.
The items change as follows:
[Yes]
[No]
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
3 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.
4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
The clock starts.
Default Settings
All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings,
language settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings
PIN, remote control code, network settings etc. return to the
factory presets.
∫ To change the Time Zone
When the time is not correct, set “Time Zone” (GMT -6 to + 6).
[Yes]
[No]
1
Press [3, 4] to select “On” of “Automatic” and press [OK] in
step 1.
Auto clock setting starts. This takes a few minutes.
“Automatic clock setting completed.” screen is displayed.
Press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select the correct time zone and press [OK].
Press [RETURN ].
2
3
4
RQT9439
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
∫ Setting the IP address
Network Settings
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without making
any changes.
These settings are used if you will connect this unit to a network.
The connection to the Internet may take time or the internet may not
be connected depending on the connection environment.
It is recommended that you use a broadband connection.
Set the IP address only when the router has no DHCP server
functions or when the router’s DHCP server function is disabled.
After performing steps 1–5 (> left)
6 Press [3, 4] to select “IP Address Auto-
assignment” and press [2, 1] to select “Off”.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “IP Address”, “Subnet
Mask” or “Gateway Address” and press [OK].
8 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
Preparation
Connect to the network. (> 99)
∫ Testing the connection
Always test the connection when a LAN cable is connected or when
new “IP Address / DNS Settings” have been made.
press [OK].
≥After checking the specifications for your broadband router,
enter each number.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
If the number is unknown, then check the number of other
devices such as personal computers connected via a LAN
cable. Assign a different number from those of other devices for
the “IP Address” and the same number for others.
≥If a wrong number is entered, then press [DEL].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Network Settings” and
press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “IP Address / DNS
Settings” and press [OK].
IP Address
IP Address / DNS Settings
Please input IP address and press “OK”.
The IP address will be cleared by pressing
“OK” when there is no number input.
Press “DEL” button if a wrong number is
entered.
ConnectionTest
䋭䋭
IP Address Auto-assignment
IP Address
On
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
On
192
0
1
.
.
.
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
DNS-IP Auto-assignment
-
9
Number
Primary DNS
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
Secondary DNS
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
Connection Speed Auto-configure
Connection Speed Setting
On
9 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
䋭䋭
[Note]
MAC Address: 00-0b-97-e6-7a-ae
OK
≥The numeric input range is between 0 and 255.
RETURN
∫ Setting the DNS-IP
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without making
any changes.
When setting an assigned DNS server from your internet service
provider, perform the following settings.
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection Test” and
press [OK].
“Testing”: The test is in progress.
After performing steps 1–5 (> left)
“OK”:
The connection is completed.
6 Press [3, 4] to select “DNS-IP Auto-
assignment” and press [2, 1] to select “Off”.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Primary DNS” or
“Secondary DNS”and press [OK].
“Failed”: Please check the connection and settings.
[Note]
≥Perform the “Connection Test” also when any change was made to
the “IP Address / DNS Settings”.
8 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
press [OK].
≥If the connection test fails, it may be necessary to set the MAC
address of this unit at the router side. The MAC address can be
displayed by selecting “Network Settings” and “IP Address / DNS
Settings” in steps 1–5 (> above).
≥Follow the instructions given by your internet service provider
and enter the numbers.
If the number is unknown, then check the number of other
devices such as personal computers connected via a LAN
cable and assign the same number.
≥If a wrong number is entered, then press [DEL].
9 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
[Note]
≥The numeric input range is between 0 and 255.
∫ Setting the connection speed
When the connection test results in “Failed” after the IP and DNS-IP
addresses are assigned, perform the following settings.
After performing steps 1–5 (> left)
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection Speed Auto-
configure” and press [2, 1] to select “Off”.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection Speed
Setting” and press [2, 1] to select a
connection speed.
≥Select a connection speed in accordance with the environment
of the network connected.
≥When the settings are changed, the network connection may be
disabled depending on the device.
RQT9439
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ Setting the proxy server
∫ Register the DLNA compatible equipment to this
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without making
unit
any changes.
After performing steps 1–4 (> 92, Testing the connection)
Please use this setting when instructed to by your Internet service
≥When connecting Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment
provider.
≥Set the proxy server only after the connection test is completed
properly.
5 Select “Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings” and
press [OK].
After performing steps 1–4 (> 92, Testing the connection)
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Proxy Server Settings”
and press [OK].
Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings
Home Network ( DLNA )
Registered devices list
Off
Proxy Server Settings
Initialize
Proxy Address
Proxy Port Number
Connection Test
0
----
Set unit name
OK
RETURN
6 Select “On” and press [OK].
OK
7 Select “Yes” and press [OK].
Access this unit from the connected DLNA compatible
equipment within 10 minutes.
RETURN
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection Test” and
≥Up to 4 devices can be registered.
press [OK].
≥Even if it is Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment, you may not
be able to register from "Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings".
In such a case, register the equipment from "Server ( DLNA )
Settings" (> below)
“Testing”:
“OK”:
The test is in progress.
The connection is completed.
Press [RETURN ] to exit.
“Failed”:
Please check the connection and settings.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Proxy Address” and
press [OK].
≥
When connecting non-Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment
(> 76, Entering text)
5 Select “Server ( DLNA ) Settings” and press
[OK].
After the input of “Proxy Address” is completed
8 Press [3, 4] to select “Proxy Port Number” and
press [OK].
9 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
press [OK].
Server ( DLNA ) Settings
Server ( DLNA ) function
MAC Address
Off
Proxy Port Number
Please input HTTP Proxy Server Port Number
and press “OK”. The number will be set to “0”
by pressing “OK” when there is no number
input. Press “DEL” button if a wrong number
is entered.
OK
0
RETURN
≥Up to 4 devices can be registered.
0
-
9
Number
6 Select the MAC Address for the connected
equipment and press [OK].
≥Up to 12 devices can display the MAC Address.
10 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To set back to default setting
After performing step 5 (> above)
7 Select “Yes” and press [OK].
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Initialize” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
∫ Viewing video in this unit via the registered
∫ Setting the internet content (VIERA CAST)
After performing steps 1–4 (> 92, Testing the connection)
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Internet Content
Settings” and press [OK].
equipment (> 75, DLNA feature)
Internet Content Settings
Lock
Off
On
Automatic Volume Control
OK
RETURN
≥Lock (> 90)
≥Automatic Volume Control
Select “On”, the volume is controlled by this unit automatically. If
you want to enjoy the original volume, set it to “Off”.
RQT9439
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software (firmware) Update
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress
may damage the unit. Don’t remove the AC mains lead during
the update.
CI Plus compatible CAM (Conditional
Access Module) software (firmware)
update
≥Software (firmware) of CAM (compatible CI Plus) can be updated
automatically from broadcasts.
Update software (firmware) of this unit
≥Availability of software (firmware) update is detected while viewing
the programmes compatible with CI Plus.
Software (firmware) of this unit can be updated automatically by
following method.
≥From broadcasts
Notification is displayed on the screen if available.
≥From Internet [network connection and setting is required. (> 92,
≥Notice is not displayed in the following cases:
–When recording a programme
–When scheduled recording and update occur simultaneously
–When displaying FUNCTION MENU, DIRECT NAVIGATOR, etc.
99)]
Update of the software (firmware) is done when it is in standby
mode.
Once the new software (firmware) is found, it will start the download
of the software (firmware), and then the upload.
Download of the software (firmware) will start automatically when the
power of this unit is turned off or when the set time comes (> 91)
≥The time it takes to update depends on the connection.
–For Broadcast: About 2 to 4 hours
Follow the on-screen instructions when updating.
∫ The unit’s display during the update
e.g.,
–For Internet: About 1 hour
(It may take longer than specified above to download because
the download time differs depending on the network
environment. It is recommended to be used in a broadband
environment.)
Time to start the download of the software (firmware) can be set
arbitrarily. If you do not want to perform the software (firmware)
update during the standby mode, set the "Software Update in
Standby" in the Setup menu to "Off". (> 91)
≥If you did not update or if the notice for update did not display on
the screen, you will be notified on the Digital Channel Information
of the channel where the update for CAM was detected.
∫ The unit’s display during the update
12:55
Change category
CAM Upgrade Info
1 ZDF
Bruder
0:50 - 2:30
All DVB Channels
e.g.,
Now
MULTI
/
Encrypted Dolby D
To perform an update, press the "Red” button and follow the on-
screen instructions.
[Note]
≥“SW-DL” : Software (firmware) is downloading.
Download will stop when the power is turned on, or the timer
recording starts.
≥“START” : Update of the software (firmware) will start once the
download is completed.
≥“UPD /” : Software (firmware) is updating.
≥“FINISH” : Updated of the software (firmware) has completed.
≥Operations such as view, playback, or record cannot be performed
while updating the CAM.
If you press the [Í] on the remote control while updating the CAM,
the power of this unit will turn off automatically after the update.
≥For details, refer to your CAM’s operating instructions or consult
your dealer.
[Note]
≥If the timer recording is scheduled within the following time at the
start of the download, the download will not be executed.
–For broadcast: Within 4 hours
–For Internet: Within 1 hour
≥If downloading on this unit fails or this unit is not connected to the
Internet, then you can download the latest software (firmware) from
the following website and burn it to a CD-R to update the software
(firmware).
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/
RQT9439
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Settings
2 Test by turning on the television and
changing channels.
Television operation
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.
≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.
Channel
Select
Turn TV on/off
Input select
TV
[Note]
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.
AV
Volume
PAGE
CH
abc
2
def
3
1
ghi
jkl
mno
4
5
6
HOLD function
The HOLD function deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
p
w
1 Point the remote control at the
television
Press and hold [OK] and
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code
with the numbered buttons.
[RETURN
]
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.
e.g.,
01:
[0] > [1]
10:
[1] > [0]
Manufacturer and Code No.
If you press a button while the HOLD function is on, “X HOLD”
appears on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
Brand
Panasonic
AIWA
AKAI
BEJING
BEKO
Code
0 /02/03/04
35
27/30
33
Brand
METZ
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
Code
05/28
05/ 9/20/47
To cancel the HOLD function
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] simultaneously until “X
HOLD” disappears.
24
36
33
NEC
05/7 /72/73/74 NOBLEX
BENQ
BP
BRANDT
BUSH
58/59
09
0/ 5
05
NOKIA
25/26/27/60/6
0
45
30/39/70
NORDMENDE
OLEVIA
ONWA
CENTREX
66
ORION
05
CHANGHONG 69
PEONY
49/69
CURTIS
DAEWOO
DESMET
DUAL
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
FINLUX
FISHER
FUJITSU
FUNAI
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
HIKONA
HITACHI
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
05
64/65
05
05
05
0/34
6
2
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PROVIEW
PYE
RADIOLA
SABA
SALORA
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
4 /48/64
05/06/46
05
37/38
52
05
05
0
53
26
63/67
05/50/5
05
36
09
32/42/43/65/68
05
2 /54/55/56
05/29/30
05/69/75/76/77/78
05/25
8
09
SCHNEIDER
SEG
SELECO
52
05/22/23/40/4 SHARP
05
30
25
49
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
TCL
TELEFUNKEN
TEVION
05
08
JINGXING
JVC
KDS
3 /33/66/67/69
0/ / 2/ 3/ 4
52
7/30/39/70
52
KOLIN
KONKA
LG
45
62
05/50/5
07/46
TEX ONDA
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE
YAMAHA
52
0/ 5/44
6/57
05
LOEWE
MAG
52
8/4
RQT9439
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional connections
Connecting a television with AUDIO/
VIDEO terminals
Connecting a stereo amplifier
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
Amplifier’s rear panel
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN VIDEO
R
L
R
L
IN
Audio cable
Audio/Video cable
VIDEO
L
Y
VIDEO
Y
P
B
R
L
P
B
R
P
R
P
R
OPTICAL
LAUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
LAUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
This unit’s rear panel
This unit’s rear panel
Connecting a television with
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
Television’s rear panel
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
R
L
R
P
B
P
Y
Component
video cable
Audio cable
VIDEO
Y
L
P
B
R
P
R
OPTICAL
LAUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
This unit’s rear panel
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (> 115) and provide a purer picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal.
[Required^setting]
“Component Resolution” setting in the Setup menu (> 90)
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)
Progressive output may cause some flickering, even if it is
progressive compatible. Set the “Component Resolution” in Setup
menu to “576i/480i” if you are concerned about it (> 90). This is the
same for multi system televisions using PAL mode.
CRT
DO NOT
Progressive output
This unit
RQT9439
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting VCR or Set Top Box (Terrestrial receiver, CATV, etc.)
Connect the unit directly to the television
This unit’s rear panel
DO NOT
If you connect the unit through an AV selector or
video cassette recorder to the television, video
signal will be affected by copyright protection
systems and the picture may not be shown
correctly.
Y
AV1
(TV)
P
B
R
VIDEO
Television
RGB/S VIDEO
P
AV2
(EXT)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
MPONENT
DEO OUT
VCR
≥When connecting to a television with a built-
in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television
side if there are both television and VCR input
terminals.
This unit
21-pin Scart cable
AV
VCR or Set Top Box’s
rear panel
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal
[Required^setting]
≥“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (> 87)
≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy
the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting “HDMI Audio Output” to “Off” in the Setup menu (> 89). In this case audio is only output
from the amplifier not the television.
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included), check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
∫ With OPTICAL
Amplifier’s rear panel
OPTICAL IN
Optical digital audio
cable
Insert the cable so its
Do not bend sharply
shape fl ts correctly
when connecting.
Into the terminal.
VIDEO
Y
L
P
B
R
P
R
This unit’s rear
panel
LNB
IN 2
OPTICAL
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
RQT9439
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional connections
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM) technology (> 114, 115).
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥When outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI Cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.
[> 72, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)]
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.
Television’s rear
AV
Connecting with a Panasonic TV
(VIERA)
HDMI IN
panel
If the 21-pin Scart cable is
connected, the following functions
are available.
HDMI cable
≥Direct TV Recording (> 72)
≥Pause Live TV programme (> 73)
Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
Receiver’s rear
panel
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
HDMI cable
This unit’s rear
panel
1
VIDEO
Y
[Required^setting]
AV1
(TV)
≥Set “HDMI Video Mode” and “HDMI
Audio Output” to “On” (> 89).
(The default setting is “On”.)
HDMI AV OUT
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
2
L
P
B
R
VIDEO
COMMON INTERFACE
RGB/S VIDEO
P
R
13V/18V
400mA max.
AV2
(EXT)
LNB
IN 1
LNB
IN 2
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
OPTICAL
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
[Note]
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 114) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
RQT9439
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network connection
Following function will be available when this unit is connected to the network.
≥This document is assuming that you already have a broadband connection.
≥This connection is not necessary if following functions are not to be used.
Playing back from other
equipment on the network
You can enjoy the video saved on the HDD of this unit on DLNA compatible equipment connected via a
network. (> 75)
Enjoying VIERA CASTTM
You can access a selection of Internet services from the Home screen with VIERA CAST, for example
YouTube, Picasa Web Albums. (Current as of December 2009) (> 74)
≥VIERA CAST requires a broadband Internet connection. Dial-up Internet connections cannot be used.
Automatically acquire the
title of the CD
Automatically acquire the title of the CD or the information about the artist. (> 71)
Update the software
(firmware) of this unit
Automatically update the software (firmware) of this unit. (> 94)
≥Update of the software (firmware) can be done from the broadcast too.
Internet
This unit’s rear panel
1
2
VIDEO
Y
AV1
(TV)
L
P
B
R
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
COMMON INTERFACE
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
R
P
13V/18V
LNB
AV2
(EXT)
LNB
IN
400mA max.
IN
1
2
AC IN
VIDEO
OPTICAL
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
RGB/S VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
Straight LAN cable
Straight LAN cable
DLNA compatible
equipment
Hub or broadband router
≥When your communication equipment (modem), etc. has no broadband
router functions: Connect a broadband router.
When your communication equipment (modem), etc. has broadband
router functions but there are no vacant ports: Connect a hub.
≥The DLNA compatible device that is to be connected to the unit should
be connected to the same hub or broadband router as the unit.
≥Use a router that supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX.
Telecommunications
equipment (modem, etc)
≥Make the necessary settings in “Network Settings” after connecting. (> 90)
[Note]
≥Refer to the operating instructions for the connected device.
≥It may not work properly depending on the equipment or environment used.
≥Depending on the contract with the provider, you may not be able to connect multiple numbers of terminals such as this unit or computers, or an
additional fee might be required.
≥Use only category 5 straight LAN cables (STP) when connecting to peripheral devices.
≥When operating the VIERA CAST, use high-speed internet service no less than 1.5 Mbps for SD (Standard Definition) and 6 Mbps for HD (High
Definition) picture quality by your local broadband company.
≥If using slow Internet connection, the video may not be displayed correctly.
≥Inserting any cable other than a LAN cable in the LAN terminal can damage the unit.
RQT9439
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operations that can be performed simultaneously
Reference
Operations that can be performed while recording or copying a title
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
Playback of still
pictures
Playback of music
recorded on HDD
Playback of HDD
Playback of discs
While recording to HDD in DR mode
≤
≤
≤
–
–
≤
≤
§
While recording to HDD in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR
modes
≤
While recording from DV input
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
While copying in normal speed mode
While copying in high speed mode
[With finalising or creating Top Menu ([+RW])]
While copying in high speed mode
≤
–
–
–
[Without finalising or creating Top Menu ([+RW])]
§
[AVCHD] It cannot playback.
≥Simultaneous operation is not possible while executing the “DV Automatic Recording” or “Flexible Recording via AV input”.
Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation
Starting of timer recording possible during the following
operations
Starting of timer recording not possible during the following
operations
≥Recording the title§1, §2, §3
≥Copying a title in normal speed mode
≥Copying a title in high speed mode (with finalising or creating Top
Menu)
≥Playing the title§4
≥Editing the title
≥Copying HD Video (AVCHD format)
≥Editing still pictures or music
≥Copying still pictures
≥Copying a title in high speed mode (without finalising or creating
Top Menu)
– Only 1 programme can be recorded
≥Executing “DV Automatic Recording”§1, §5
≥Executing “Flexible Recording via AV input”§1, §5
≥Executing Pause Live TV§1, §2
≥Copying music
≥Formatting
≥Finalising/Creating Top Menu ([+RW])
§1
Cannot be executed when “One cable” has been selected in Auto
Setup (> 18, 83)
Executing operation will terminate when 2 programmes
§2
simultaneous recording cannot be performed.
While recording an encrypted broadcast, you cannot record
§3
another encrypted broadcast.
Playback of disc will terminate when the timer recording to disc is
§4
started while playing back from the disc.
Executing operation will be terminated.
§5
Language code list
Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
Afar:
Afrikaans:
Albanian:
Amharic:
Arabic:
Armenian:
Assamese:
Aymara:
Azerbaijani:
Bashkir:
6566 Catalan:
6565 Chinese:
6570 Corsican:
8381 Croatian:
6577 Czech:
6582 Danish:
7289 Dutch:
6583 English:
6589 Esperanto:
6590 Estonian:
6665 Faroese:
6985 Fiji:
6765 Gujarati:
9072 Hausa:
6779 Hebrew:
7282 Hindi:
6783 Hungarian:
6865 Icelandic:
7876 Indonesian:
6978 Interlingua:
6979 Irish:
7185 Lingala:
7265 Lithuanian:
7387 Macedonian:
7273 Malagasy:
7285 Malay:
7383 Malayalam:
7378 Maltese:
7365 Maori:
7165 Marathi:
7384 Moldavian:
7465 Mongolian:
7487 Nauru:
7578 Nepali:
7583 Norwegian:
7575 Oriya:
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:
7579 Persian:
7585 Polish:
7678 Rhaeto-Romance:
Tamil:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
7684
8277 Tatar:
8279 Telugu:
8285 Thai:
8377 Tibetan:
8365 Tigrinya:
7775 Romanian:
7771 Russian:
7783 Samoan:
7776 Sanskrit:
7784 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Tonga:
7773 Serbian: 8382 Turkish:
7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:
6984 Italian:
7779 Shona:
7778 Sindhi:
7865 Singhalese:
7869 Slovak:
7879 Slovenian:
7982 Somali:
8378 Twi:
8368 Ukrainian:
8373 Urdu:
7079 Japanese:
7074 Javanese:
7073 Kannada:
7082 Kashmiri:
7089 Kazakh:
7176 Kirghiz:
7565 Korean:
6869 Kurdish:
6976 Laotian:
7576 Latin:
Basque:
Bengali; Bangla:
Finnish:
8375 Uzbek:
8376 Vietnamese:
8379 Volapük:
6983 Welsh:
8385 Wolof:
8387 Xhosa:
8386 Yiddish:
8476 Yoruba:
8471 Zulu:
6678 French:
6890 Frisian:
6672 Galician:
6682 Georgian:
6671 German:
7789 Greek:
Bhutani:
Bihari:
Breton:
7065 Sundanese:
8076 Swahili:
8084 Swedish:
8065 Tagalog:
8185 Tajik:
Bulgarian:
Burmese:
Byelorussian: 6669 Greenlandic:
Cambodian: 7577 Guarani:
7679 Portuguese:
7665 Punjabi:
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:
RQT9439
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.
Set up
Is it possible to copy to the disc, SD card, or USB
memory after copying HD video (AVCHD format)
to the HDD?
Can this unit receive or record High Definition
(HD) broadcasts?
¾ Yes, this unit can receive or record High Definition (HD)
¾ It can be copied to the disc.
–It will be copied with SD quality. (It cannot be copied as it is in
HD picture quality.)
broadcasts. Record in DR recording mode.
¾ It cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory.
What do I need to play multi channel surround
sound?
¾ Connect the appropriate amplifier/receiver to the HDMI AV OUT
TV Guide
terminal, the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal. (> 97, 98)
Is it possible to programme a recording, with a
start and end time that are different from the TV
Guide system?
Are the headphones and speakers directly
connected to the unit?
¾ You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through
¾ You can change the start and end time of programmes in the
Timer Recording menu. (> 33, 86)
the amplifier etc. (> 96, 97, 98)
Can I receive TV Guide system data via a Set Top
Box?
¾ No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with
Set Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature or your
unit’s manual timer programming. (> 33, 55)
My television has Scart terminal, COMPONENT
VIDEO IN terminals and HDMI IN terminal. Which
should I connect with?
¾ The different levels of picture quality input are listed below in
order from highest to lowest.
HDMI IN )COMPONENT VIDEO IN ) Scart)VIDEO IN.
However, it will take longer for the picture output to start up
when this unit is connected with the HDMI IN terminal.
How can I cancel a TIMER programming?
¾ Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then
press [DEL]. (> 35)
When are the software (firmware) updates
broadcast?
¾ The unit shows automatically when a software (firmware)
update has been broadcast, and also automatically updates the
software (firmware) if the time is specified in “Software Update
in Standby”. (> 91)
What happens when I unplug the unit from the
household mains socket?
¾ The TV Guide data will not be updated.
¾ If the unit is disconnected from the household mains socket for
a longer period of time, the TV Guide data will be lost.
¾ Clock setting will be erased and timer recording will not work.
Disc
USB
Can I play DVD-Video bought in another country?
What can or cannot be done using the USB port
on this unit?
¾ You can play DivX, MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB
memory. (> 42, 60, 66)
¾ You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the
HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 64)
¾ Playback of the following discs is not possible. (> Cover)
–DVD-Video discs that do not include region “2” or “ALL”.
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.
¾ You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD. (> 71)
¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the
HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 59)
Can DVD-Video that does not have a region
number be played?
¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy HD Video to the
HDD. (> 58)
¾ Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB
memory.
¾ Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory
cannot be formatted on this unit.
¾ The region management information for DVD-Video indicates
that the disc conforms to industry standards. You cannot play
discs that do not conform to industry standards or do not have a
region number.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 11)
Please tell me about disc compatibility with this
unit.
¾ Refer to “HDD and disc information”. (> 6–10)
Music
What will happen if I try to record the same CD
multiple times?
Recording
¾ New album will be made following the existing album.
Can I record from a commercially purchased
video cassette or DVD?
Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the
disc or USB memory?
¾ No, you cannot.
¾ Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy
protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.
Can the disc recorded with this unit play on other
equipment?
Regarding Frequently asked questions for copying (> 50)
¾ Refer to “Play on other players” in “HDD and disc information”.
(> 9)
Can I copy to a disc at high speed copy?
¾ Yes, you can. (But you may not high speed copy depending on
the disc to copy or the title.) (> 50)
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.
RQT9439
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages
On the television
Authorisation Error.
≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different registration code.
You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX) (> 43)
Cannot finish recording completely. ≥The programme was copy-protected.
≥The HDD or disc may be full.
≥The maximum number of programme has been exceeded. (> 28)
Cannot play.
Incompatible TV system setting !
≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV system
currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit. (> 89)
Cannot record to the disc.
Cannot format.
≥The disc may be dirty or scratched. (> 15)
Cannot play on this unit.
≥You tried to play a non-compatible image. (> 112)
≥Turn the unit off and re-insert the USB memory or card. (> 15)
No folders.
≥There is no compatible folder in this unit. (> 113)
No SD card
No valid SD card.
≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already inserted, turn off
the unit, remove and then re-insert the card. (> 15)
≥The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match. (> 112)
Not enough space in the copy
destination.
≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items. (> 24, 45, 81)
≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination Capacity” is not
exceeded.
The disc is not recordable.
This disc is not formatted properly.
Rental Expired.
≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert an unfinalised disc.
≥You inserted an unformatted disc. (> 81)
≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it.
$ This operation cannot be
performed now.
≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
– Depending on the disc, you may not be able to perform search or skip when film previews and
warning screens are being played back.
$ This operation is prohibited by
this disc.
≥Depending on the disc, you may not be able to perform search or skip when film previews and
warning screens are being played back.
When removing a recorded disc
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
∫ To finalise the disc
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a
disc name, select “Top Menu” (> 82), “Auto-Play Select” (> 82) or
“Disc Name” (> 80) in “DVD Management” before finalising.
Finalise
Finalise the disc to enable playback on other
DVD players.
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising.This may take up to min.
Finalise the disc ?
∫ To open the tray without disc finalisation
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
Press the REC button to start finalise.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
This disc cannot be played on other players
without finalising.
RQT9439
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
DVD
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
(“∑” stands for a number.)
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more than
5 seconds. (> 91)
CAM-UP
GUIDE
≥CAM is being updated. (> 94)
≥TV Guide data is being downloaded. (> 36)
FINISH
≥The software (firmware) update is complete. (> 94)
HARD ERR§
NoERAS
≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
≥You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
NoREAD
≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit. (> 15)
≥This message may appear when the lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc. (> 14)
NoWRIT
≥You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
PLEASE WAIT§
≥Displayed when the unit is started and turned off. This is not malfunction. It takes some minutes until the
message disappears depending on the status of the unit. You can not turn the unit on while the message is
displayed.
≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its
recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait until the
message disappears.
PROG FULL§
REMOVE
START
≥There are already 64 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes. (> 35)
≥The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device.
≥Update of the software (firmware) is started.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete. (> 94)
SW-DL
≥Software (firmware) is downloading.
Download will stop when the power is turned on, or the timer recording starts. (> 94)
UNFORMAT§
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL, or DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)
that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it. (> 81)
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.
UNSUPPORT§
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on. (> 6–10)
≥You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory.
UPD /
(“∑” stands for a number.)
≥The software (firmware) is being updated.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete. (> 94)
U50
≥The terminal, antenna cable or dish is short-circuited as for both LNB IN 1 and LNB IN 2. Check the connection
status. (> 17)
U50 1
U50 2
U59
≥The terminal, antenna cable or dish is short-circuited as for LNB IN 1. Check the connection status. (> 17)
≥The terminal, antenna cable or dish is short-circuited as for LNB IN 2. Check the connection status. (> 17)
≥The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
U61
≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or copy. This
is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not broken. Once the
display clears you can use the unit again.
U72
U73
≥The HDMI connection acts unusually.
–The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
–Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
–The HDMI cable is damaged.
U76
U77
U88
≥HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright protection.
≥Due to the current disc not having authorised copyright information, video output is not performed.
≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while recording,
playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again. (> 104)
U99
≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Now press [Í/
I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
H or F
≥ There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s condition.)
≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the following.
(> 104–110)
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the dealer. Inform
the dealer of the service number when requesting service.
X HOLD
≥The HOLD function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears. (> 95)
RQT9439
§
The message scrolls on the unit’s display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
103
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
Updating to the latest software (firmware) may solve the problem. (> 94)
The following do not indicate a problem with this
The clock does not display on the unit when
switched to standby.
¾ The clock does not display when “Power Save” is set to “On”.
unit:
≥Regular disc rotating sounds.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting
breaks.
Ensure “Power Save” is set to “Off”. (> 91)
≥Operations are slow to respond in power save mode.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again
using a Panasonic disc.)
≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being
activated. (Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for
3 seconds.)
Available disc space display is showing different
from what was used
¾ Available disc space display may be different from actual.
Varying may be large especially when recorded in DR mode.
≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be
ejected.
¾ The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following
Power
to eject the disc.
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on
the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is forcibly
switched to standby.
No power.
The unit does not turn on pressing [Í].
¾ Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active
2
While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the
disc.
household mains socket. (> 17)
The unit switches to standby mode.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the
TV screen and video
main unit to turn the unit on.
Television reception worsens after connecting
the unit.
¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided between
the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal
booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved
by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
The power is turned off automatically.
¾ If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV
with an HDMI cable, or connected this unit to a Q Link-
compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable, this unit will
be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to
standby mode.
The digital channel information or Control Panel
does not appear.
¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) that the “On-Screen
Messages” in the Setup menu will be displayed. (> 88)
¾ The digital channel information will not appear during playback.
¾ The Control Panel is only displayed when connected to a TV
with “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (> 73)
This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.
¾ If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA)
with the “Intelligent Auto Standby” setting activated on the TV,
when switching the TV input, the unit will be automatically
turned to standby. For details please read the operating
instructions of the TV.
Displays
Picture does not appear during timer recording.
¾ Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off.
To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the
unit on.
The display is dim.
¾ Change “Unit’s Display” in the Setup menu. (> 88)
Screen size is wrong.
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.
¾ Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does
not have that function, set “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup
menu to “Off” (> 89) and “Component Resolution” to “576i/
480i”. (> 90)
¾ Check the following setting in the Setup menu. (> 88)
–“TV Aspect”, “Aspect for 4:3 Video”
¾ Check “Aspect for Recording” before recording or file
conversion. (> 86)
¾ If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” in the
Setup menu to “16:9”. (> 88)
¾ Set the clock. (> 91)
The time recorded on the disc and the available
time shown do not add up.
The displayed time of this unit is different from
the actual recording time.
¾ Times shown may disagree with actual times.
¾ [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The remaining capacity does not increase
even if titles are deleted.
¾ Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or
+RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted. It
does not increase if other titles are deleted.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to
your television’s operating instructions.
¾ If you record or edit about 200 times or more, the remaining
capacity of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, and +R DL is reduced and
then recording or editing may be disabled (for the second layer
on DVD-R DL and +R DL, this happens after about 60 times).
¾ While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
Compared to the actual recorded time, the
elapsed time displayed is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
¾ The displayed recording/play time is converted from the
number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to
one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour
elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes 56
seconds). This does not affect the recording.
RQT9439
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pictures do not appear with the HD quality
although HD setting was made.
The picture is distorted during play, or video will
not play correctly.
¾ Even if this unit is connected to a TV through COMPONENT
VIDEO terminals and the Component Resolution is set to 720p
or 1080i, the pictures of HD broadcast output from this unit are
output with 576p/480p.
¾ You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor
reception or unfavourable weather conditions.
¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear
briefly between recorded titles in the following situations:
–between titles recorded with different recording modes.
–between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
–between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
–between playlist chapters.
The screen changes automatically.
¾ If there is no operation for 5 minutes or more, the displayed
screen switches to the other states automatically. (only when
the “Screen Saver” in Setup menu is set to “On”.) (> 88)
¾ Make sure the connections are pushed firmly. (> 17, 96–99)
Sound
The recorded title is stretched vertically.
¾ It may have been recorded with 4:3 aspect ratio. You will be
able to view in 16:9 aspect ration by setting the “Aspect for 4:3
Video” in Setup menu to “4:3”. (> 88)
No sound.
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio type.
¾ Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings.
Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have connected
one. (> 17, 87, 96–99)
¾ Check if TV is muted.
¾ Check if amplifier is muted.
¾ Sound is not output while fast-forwarding during chasing
playback and simultaneous record and playback.
¾ Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. (> 38)
¾ Turn the “Sound Effects” in the Sound menu to “Off” in the
following cases. (> 78)
¾ If the 16:9 aspect ratio image is output to a 4:3 TV connected
with the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal or the HDMI AV
OUT terminal, it will be stretched vertically. Adjust by the aspect
ratio setting on the TV. If you cannot make the adjustment, set
the “Component Resolution” in the Setup menu to “576p/480p”
and “HDMI Video Format” to “576p/480p”. (> 89, 90)
¾ 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases.
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode.
–If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.
–If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in
the Setup menu. (> 86)
When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same
aspect, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the
“Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”. (> 86)
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer
to your television’s operating instructions.
–When using discs that do not have surround sound effects
such as Karaoke discs.
–When playing bilingual broadcast titles.
¾ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
¾ Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
¾ The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is
output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT terminal.
There is a lot of after-image when playing video.
¾ Set “HD optimizer” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (> 78)
¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable,
set “HDMI Audio Output” to “On” in the Setup menu. (> 89)
¾ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be
distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
When playing DVD-Video using progressive
output, one part of the picture momentarily
appears to be doubled up.
¾ This problem is caused by the editing method or material used
on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlaced
output.
Cannot switch audio.
¾ You cannot switch the audio (L, R) in the following cases.
–When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (> 88)
If outputting from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal, set
“Component Resolution” to “576i/480i” in the Setup menu.
(> 90)
–When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default
setting is “On”). (> 86)
¾ The amplifier is connected using an optical digital audio cable
or an HDMI cable. You cannot switch the audio if “Dolby Digital/
Dolby Digital Plus”, “DTS” or “MPEG” is set to “Bitstream”. Set
“Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Plus”, “DTS” or “MPEG” to “PCM” or
connect using audio cables. (> 87, 98, 98)
¾ There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of
how the disc was created.
There is no apparent change in picture quality
when adjusted with the Picture menu in the on-
screen menus.
¾ The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.
The images from this unit do not appear on the
television.
Picture is distorted.
¾ Make sure that the television is connected to the AV1 terminal,
the VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals
or HDMI terminal on this unit. (> 17, 96)
¾ Make sure that the television’s input setting is correct.
¾ When “Component Resolution” in the Setup menu is set to
“576p/480p” or “720p”, but the connected television is not
progressive compatible, press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY) on
the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds to
cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used
by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and
[< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds. The
system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (> 89)
¾ When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that
matches with this unit’s TV system.
¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
RQT9439
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Operation
Recording, timer recording and
copying
Cannot operate the television.
The remote control doesn’t work.
¾ Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be
operated even if you change the code. (> 95)
¾ The remote control and main unit are using different codes.
Change the code on the remote control. (> 91)
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
¾ You can not record to the disc by pressing the [¥ REC] or timer
recording.
¾ [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] The disc is unformatted. Format
the disc. (> 81)
¾ The disc is protected with DVD Management. (> 80)
¾ You cannot record/copy when there is not enough space or
when the number of titles has reached its limit. Delete
unwanted titles or use a new disc. (> 24, 45, 81)
¾ [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] In the following situations,
you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and
then copy. (> 24, 45, 81)
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated
number button at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
¾ The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones. (> 3)
¾ You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s
remote control signal sensor during operation. (> 3)
¾ Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
¾ Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that
may be subject to sunlight exposure.
¾ Software (firmware) is updating when “UPD /” is displaying
on the unit’s display. Wait until the update is completed. (> 94)
¾ It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again
after changing the batteries. (> 91)
–If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will
copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire disc,
HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode recording
is necessary).
–If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be
copied has exceeded 999.
¾ You cannot copy on finalised discs. However, you can record
and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
¾ Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW you may be unable to
record onto or edit them if you either insert and remove the disc
or switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of
30 times.
¾ Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be
able to be copied to.
¾ This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes
can be recorded/copied onto the HDD.)
¾ It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after
changing the batteries. (> 95)
¾ The HOLD function is activated. (> 95)
The unit is on but cannot be operated.
¾ Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected
properly.
¾ Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
¾ The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to
disappear.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit
is not guaranteed.
¾ Some broadcasts are copyright protected.
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on
the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is forcibly
switched to standby.
Cannot record from external equipment.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one
minute, then reconnect it.
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still
cannot be operated, consult the dealer.
¾ Check that the connection is correct. (> 56, 97)
¾ The proper external input channel (AV2, AV3, or DV) is not
selected. Press [INPUT SELECT] to change.
¾ Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.
¾ Recording-restricted or copy-restricted programmes may not be
recorded.
2
Cannot eject disc.
¾ The unit is recording.
Cannot record 2 programmes simultaneously.
¾ It cannot in following conditions.
¾ The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and
hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for about
5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the HOLD function is activated, above operation does not
work. Cancel the HOLD function. (> 95)
–One satellite cable is connected to this unit.
–“One cable” has been selected in Auto Setup (> 18, 22, 83)
–Record 2 programmes from external input
–When performing high speed copying (1 programme can be
recorded to HDD)
Cannot tune channels.
¾ Check the connections.
–Recording from DV input, while recording to discs with
“Flexible Recording via AV input” function.
Startup is slow.
¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:
– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
– The clock is not set.
– Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is
connected.
– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
¾ Set “Power Save” to “Off” in the Setup menu. (> 91)
This is a normal phenomenon when using VIERA Link (HDAVI
Control 4 or later). For details please read the operating
instructions for the TV.
RQT9439
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The recording lacks the beginning or ending part
of the programme although the timer recording
was set on TV Guide.
¾ This occurs when the broadcast signals are not correct. We
recommend you set the timer again, allowing enough time for
the start and end time. (> 86)
The quality has dropped when the title in HDD is
copied to the disc.
¾ Titles in HD quality (titles recorded in DR mode or titles in
AVCHD) will be copied as SD quality when copied to [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW].
The DV automatic recording function does not
work.
¾ If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted,
check the connections and DV equipment settings. (> 56)
¾ You cannot start recording until the images from the DV
equipment appear on the television.
Timer recording does not stop even when [∫] is
pressed.
¾ When using the linked timer recording with external equipment,
press [EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display disappears.)
(> 55)
¾ Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes
on the tape in the DV equipment are not successive.
¾ Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may
not operate properly.
Timer recording does not work properly.
¾ The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme
¾ The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV
tape. (> 57)
times overlap (
(> 35)
is displayed). Correct the programme.
¾ The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer
icon “F” (red) in the timer recording list is grey.) (> 34)
¾ Set the clock. (> 91)
You cannot press [INPUT SELECT] to select
external input other than AV2.
¾ You cannot select external input other than AV2 when this unit
is in EXT LINK Standby mode or recording. Press [EXT LINK] to
cancel EXT LINK Standby mode. (> 55)
The timer programme remains even after
recording finishes.
¾ The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly. (> 33)
Recorded title cannot be played back anymore.
¾ There are some titles that are copyright protected (Copying is
prohibited) for which the playback is disabled after a
predetermined time. (> 30)
A part or whole of a recorded title has been lost.
¾ If there is a power failure or the AC mains lead is disconnected
from the household mains socket while recording or editing, the
title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or
use a new disc. We cannot offer any guarantee regarding lost
programmes or discs. (> 81, 86)
Play
¾ If you use Auto Renewal Recording, the old title will be deleted
after the new title is recorded. (> 34)
Play fails to start even when [1] (PLAY) is
pressed.
Play starts but then stops immediately.
Cannot copy to a disc using the high speed
mode.
¾ High speed copying cannot be performed depending on the
disc or title that is being copied. Refer to “When is high speed
copy not possible?” for details. (> 50)
¾ Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (> 15)
¾ The disc is dirty, scratched or marked. (> 15)
¾ You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
(> 10)
¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to have a top menu on the
equipment used for recording.
¾ When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8 hours) mode, play
may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with
DVD-RAM. In this case use EP (6 hours) mode. (> 86)
¾ You cannot playback while executing the “Flexible Recording
via AV input” or when recording from the DV input.
¾ If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you
purchased it. (DivX)
When copying, it takes a long time even when
high speed mode is selected.
¾ Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if
the disc is high speed recording compatible, the maximum
speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.
¾ It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
¾ You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours
when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not
compatible with EP (8 hours) mode recording.
¾ Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages
are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.
An unusually loud sound is coming from the
rotating disc.
¾ When recording or high speed copying to a disc, the sound of
the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is not
a problem.
¾ If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
( Silent )” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup
menu. (> 86)
RQT9439
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Audio and video momentarily pause.
¾ This occurs between playlist chapters.
It takes time before play starts.
¾ This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)
¾ This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles
on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.
¾ This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the
unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in
the same way as a normal programme. However, video and
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching
layers. (> 38)
Picture stops.
¾ Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX).
Cannot see the beginning of the title played.
¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI
cable)
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you
may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the
picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the
beginning of the title.
DVD-Video is not played.
¾ You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change
this setting. (> 85)
¾ Ensure the disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number,
and is not defective. (> Cover)
Edit
The available recording time doesn’t increase
even after deleting titles on the disc.
¾ Available space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, or +R DL does not
increase even after deleting previous titles.
¾ Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW
increases when you delete the last title.
Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be
selected.
¾ The languages are not recorded on the disc.
¾ You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the
soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus
to make changes. (> 21)
Cannot edit.
¾ You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available
space.
No subtitles.
¾ Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
¾ Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitles” on the on-screen menu to
“On”. (> 77)
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (> 24)
Cannot format.
¾ The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
(> 15)
¾ Disc may be defective or of poor quality.
¾ You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in
this unit. (> 10)
Angle cannot be changed.
¾ Angles can only be changed during scenes where different
angles are recorded.
You have forgotten your ratings PIN.
You want to cancel the ratings level.
¾ The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc
tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive,
then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit
at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on
the unit’s display).
Cannot create chapters.
Cannot mark the start point or the end point
during “Partial Delete” operation.
¾ The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when
you turn it off or remove the disc.
¾ These operations are not possible with still pictures.
¾ You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You
cannot set an end point before a start point.
Image for the Quick View is not smooth.
¾ Image may not be played back smoothly in case of DR, HG,
HX, HE, HL mode titles or [AVCHD].
¾ This function does not work when recording is in XP or FR
mode.
Cannot delete chapters.
¾ [HDD] [RAM] When the chapter is too short to delete, use
“Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer. (> 47)
Cannot create a playlist.
¾ Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit.
The resume play function does not work.
¾ Memorized positions are cancelled when
– open the disc tray.
– [SD] [CD] [USB] turn off the power.
([HDD] will not be cancelled)
Still pictures
Cannot display Picture View screen.
¾ This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy.
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.
Slow-motion playback does not go reverse.
Reverse frame-by-frame does not work properly.
¾ Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings
are different from the title recorded on the disc. (> 89)
¾ Slow-motion playback in reverse does not work for [AVCHD].
¾ [AVCHD] Reverse frame-by-frame cannot be done.
¾ Frame-by-frame backward for titles that have copied the
AVCHD will be reversed in 10 frame units.
Cannot edit or format a card.
¾ Release the card’s protection setting. (> 11)
¾ Slow-motion and frame-by-frame do not work with the title
recorded from radio service.
RQT9439
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide
The contents of the card cannot be read.
¾ Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this
does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.
¾ The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents
on the card may be damaged.) (> 11)
¾ This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD
Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as
SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format.
The TV Guide System does not receive any data.
¾ Check whether the clock is properly set. (> 91)
¾ If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the
TV Guide system may not be able to receive any data.
The empty field is displayed for some or all
stations.
¾ The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that
are not compatible with this unit. (> 113)
¾ You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to
2 GB and SDHC Memory Cards with capacities from 4 GB to
32 GB.
¾ Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system.
¾ Programme the Timer recording manually. (> 33)
The TV Guide information is not displayed
properly.
¾ There was a programme change, or TV Guide information from
a broadband cast station was possibly not correctly transmitted.
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV
Guide system provider or station provider.
Copying, deleting and setting protection takes a
long time.
¾ When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take
a few hours.
¾ When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a
long time. Format the disc or card. (> 81)
The TV Guide data transfer was interrupted.
¾ The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to
the interruption.
Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.
¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as Progressive
JPEG, etc., may not play back. (> 112)
¾ The programme information may be incomplete.
Music
The TV Guide data is not updated.
¾ Make sure that the time is set correctly. (> 91)
Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.
¾ If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS
restrictions, they will not be copied.
Digital broadcast
¾ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA
specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
¾ Bonus tracks may not be copied.
Digital broadcasts cannot be received.
¾ The dish may not be pointing in the direction of the satellite, or
the direction of the dish may have changed due to strong winds
or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial
installer.
Title of the newly released CD cannot be
acquired.
¾ Reception may be disturbed in bad weather.
¾ To record an encrypted broadcast, a CAM (Conditional Access
Module) with Smart Card valid for the broadcast is required.
¾ Title cannot be acquired if the title is not registered in the built-in
GracenoteR database. Connection to the network is necessary
to acquire title for the newly released CD. (> 99)
TV reception worsens after connecting the unit.
¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided between
the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal
booster, available from electronics retailers.
ID3 tag of a MP3 file is not completely displayed.
¾ Only the track name and artist name can be displayed with this
unit.
The digital channel information does not appear.
¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) in the “On-Screen
Messages” in the Setup menu. (> 88)
¾ The digital satellite channel information will not appear during
playback.
USB
The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.
¾ Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert
again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the
unit again.
¾ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (> 15)
¾ The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not
compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory
may be damaged.) (> 11)
¾ The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file
extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (> 113)
¾ USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a
USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 11)
¾ If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB
memory may not be recognized by this unit.
¾ You can use USB memories with capacities up to 128 GB.
USB memory cannot be operated.
¾ Turn the power of this unit off once, and turn it back on. If it
cannot be operated after that, set “VIERA Link” to “Off” and turn
the power of this unit off again, and turn it back on. (> 89)
RQT9439
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
To reset this unit
Picture regularly breaks up on some channels.
“No signal” message is displayed.
¾ Check aerial connection.
¾ Check that the satellite dish and satellite cable are designed for
DVB.
¾ Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength”
are displayed in red or constantly changing, check aerial. If
problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer. (> 84)
¾ Interference (known as impulse noise) from household
appliances such as light switches, fridges etc. may cause
picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality
quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and
antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If
problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
¾ Check the reception capacity of the satellite dish. The dish must
be large enough for good reception. There must not be any
hindrances in the way which could impair reception, e.g. twigs,
leaves, snow.
To return all the settings other than the main ones
to the factory preset
¾ Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the
settings except for the ratings level and ratings PIN, etc. return
to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled. (> 91)
¾ Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the
settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings, language
settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings PIN,
remote control code, network settings, etc. return to the factory
presets. (> 91)
¾ Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
Auto Setup screen appears. All the settings except for the
ratings level, ratings PIN and clock settings, etc. return to the
factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled.
¾ Adjust the aerial reception with “Manual Tuning” in the Setup
menu. (> 84)
¾ The receiver (LNB) of the satellite dish must be suitable for
digital reception.
To reset the ratings level settings
¾ While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select
the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on
the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or
all channels.
¾ Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant
lighting storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy” locations may
cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort
momentarily.
¾ Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical
appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy”
ignition system.
To restore the unit if it freezes due to one of the
safety devices being activated
¾ Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 3 seconds. (The
settings remain.)
Network
¾ The reception capacity of the satellite dish is not sufficient.
I can’t connect to the network.
¾ Has the LAN cable become unplugged? Check that the LAN
cable is properly connected. (> 99)
¾ Have you plugged in a modular cable for use with a telephone
into the LAN terminal on this unit? Connect with a straight LAN
cable. (> 99)
¾ Is the power for the modem or broadband router turned on?
Turn the power on for each device.
¾ Is there a mistake in the network settings? Follow any
instructions you may have received from your ISP (Internet
Service Provider) and make changes to the settings.
¾ Are the broadband router settings correct? Read the operating
instructions for the broadband router.
¾ Is the broadband router and/or modem correctly connected?
Check the operating instructions for each device and connect
accordingly.
After the Auto-setup, there aren’t any stations in
the station list.
¾ “Shipping Condition” was performed or the unit was in the
delivery status. The Auto-setup was then started and
interrupted.
Do an Auto-setup again and let it continue right through to the
end. The data is only saved after this has been completed.
VIERA Link
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
¾ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is
displayed on the front display when the power for the main unit
is set to On.
¾ Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (> 89)
¾ Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.
¾ Some functions may not work if depending on the version of
“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit supports
“HDAVI Control 4” functions.
¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was
changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was
removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control”
may not work.
While using my PC, I cannot connect to the
network.
¾ Does your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or service contract
prevent multiple terminals connecting at the same time? Check
the content of your contract.
Other
In this case, perform the following operations.
1
When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the
power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.
After performing an update, you can no longer
receive broadcasts.
¾ Depending on the content of the update, some settings may
2
Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”
function to off, and then set to on again. (For more
information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)
Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit,
and after this unit’s screen is displayed check that “HDAVI
Control” is working.
have returned to the preset values. Fix the settings again.
3
Pause Live TV stops.
¾ Pause Live TV from AV1, AV2 or AV3 input stops when a timer
recording from external input started.
The Control Panel does not appear.
¾ The Control Panel is only displayed when connected to a TV
with “HDAVI Control 2” or later function. (> 73)
The operation on this unit (music playback etc.)
is interrupted.
¾ The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press
buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA
Link functions.
RQT9439
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Recording system
Audio
DVD-RAM:
DVD-R:
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-RW:
DVD Video Recording format
DVD-Video format
Recording system:
Dolby Digital 2ch (XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode),
Linear PCM (XP mode),
DVD-Video format
DVD-Video format
Dolby Digital Max 5.1ch (DVB-S/S2) (DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode)
Dolby Digital Plus Max 5.1ch (DVB-S/S2) (DR mode)
MPEG 2ch (DR mode)
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Audio in:
Input level:
Input impedance:
Audio out:
Output level:
Output impedance:
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
HDMI terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
More than 10 k≠
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Less than 1 k≠
Recordable discs
DVD-RAM:
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
DVD-R (SL):
DVD-R (DL):
DVD-RW:
HDMI Output
19 pin type A: 1 pc
HDMI™ (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM
)
+R (SL):
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
+R (DL):
+RW:
Internal HDD capacity
250 GB
DV Input
USB Port
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin: 1 pc
Type A: 1 pc
Playable discs
DVD-RAM:
DVD Video Recording format, AVCHD format, JPEG
DVD-R: DVD-Video format§1, AVCHD format§1, MP3§1, 2, JPEG§1, 2
,
SD Card Slot
1 pc
DivX§1, 2
DVD-Video format§1, AVCHD format§1
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
,
LAN (Ethernet) Port
CI (Common Interface) Slot
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
MP3§1, 2, JPEG§1, 2, DivX§1, 2
DVD-RW:
DVD-Video format§1, DVD Video Recording format,
AVCHD format§1
EN 50221 Standard,
2 slot Type I and II PC Card (5 V only) rear side
+R§1, +R DL (Double Layer)§1, +RW
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA)
CD-R/CD-RW:
CD-DA§1, MP3§1, 2, JPEG§1, 2, DivX§1, 2
Television system
Tuner System:
Antenna receive frequency:
Input level:
Input impedance:
Demodulation:
LNB input:
DVB-S/S2
Optical pick-up
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
950 MHz to 2150 MHz
–65 dBm to –25 dBm
Nominal 75 ≠
662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product
Wave length:
QPSK, 8PSK
F shape terminal female, power supply 13 V/18 V
max. 400 mA
Not provided
Not provided
LNB output:
RF converter output:
DiSEqC:
CD
DVD
780 nm wave length
662 nm wave length
Version 1.0 or Tone burst A/B, 22 kHz 0.65 Vp-p
Laser power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
Others
Video
Video system:
Region code:
PAL/NTSC
DVD: #2
Recording system:
Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)/MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Operating temperature:
Operating humidity range:
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Dimensions (WkHkD):
5 oC to 40 oC
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Approx. 64 W
AV2 (21 pin) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB in (PAL):
430 mmk59 mmk239 mm (excluding the projecting parts)
430 mmk59 mmk259 mm (including the projecting parts)
Approx. 3.5 kg
AV2 (21 pin), 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
Component video output
Mass:
Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)
Approx. 7 W (“Power Save” is set to “Off”)
(PAL 576i/576p/720p/1080i, NTSC 480i/480p/720p/1080i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RQT9439
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
SD Card
JPEG
Slot:
SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc
SD Memory Card§3, SDHC Memory Card
FAT12, FAT16§4 (In case of SD Memory Card)
FAT32§4 (In case of SDHC Memory Card)
Playable
media
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
[SD]
Compatible media:
Format:
File format
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera
File system)§9
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
Data that can be played:
JPEG, SD (Standard Definition)-Video§5
,
HD (High Definition)-Video
Number of
pixels
Between 34k34 and 8192k8192 pixels
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
USB device
USB standard:
Format:
USB 2.0 High Speed
FAT16, FAT32
MP3, JPEG, DivX,
Thawing Time Approx. 2 sec. in case of SD card (8.1 M pixels,
JPEG)
Data that can be played:
SD (Standard Definition)-Video§6, HD (High Definition)-Video§7
Number of
folders
[CD] Maximum number of folders recognizable: 99
folders (including the root folder)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [USB] [SD]
DivX
Playable
media
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300
folders (including the root folder)
File format
DivX
Number of
files
[CD] Maximum number of files recognizable: 999
files
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [USB] [SD] Maximum number of
files recognizable: 3000 files
[HDD] Maximum number of files recognizable: 9999
files
≥Files must have the
extension “.DIVX”,
“.divx”, “.AVI” or
“.avi”.
Number of
folders
Maximum number of folders recognizable : 300
folders
(including the root folder)
MOTION
JPEG
Not supported
Number of
files
Maximum number of files recognizable: 200 files
PROGRESSIVE
JPEG
Support
version
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not
supported. DivX, DivX Certified, and associated
logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used
under license.
≥It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
≥When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not
display or be playable.
Video
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
–Number of stream: Up to 1
–Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
–Picture size: 32k32 to 720k576
–FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
–Number of stream: Up to 8
–Format: MP3, MPEG, Dolby Digital
–Multi channel: Dolby Digital is possible. MPEG
multi is 2 ch conversion.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders and some files (tracks) may not display or
be playable.
≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders may not play in the order you numbered them.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.
SD (Standard Definition)-Video
[SD]§5 [USB]§6
Playable
media
[Note]
≥Specifications are subject to change without notice.
≥Useable capacity will be less. (SD card)
Codec
MPEG2
§1
SD-Video format§8 used on Standard Definition
Camera (Panasonic and some other's)
Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.
ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended formats) and Joliet
This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-R DL).
File Format
§2
This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)
Includes microSD cards. (A microSD adaptor needs to be
inserted.)
Long file name is unsupported.
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from SD
card to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
HD (High Definition)-Video
§3
[SD] [USB]§7
Playable
media
§4
Codec
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
§5
File Format
AVCHD format conforming
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-
RAM disc is completed, the playback becomes possible.
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB
MP3
§6
Playable
media
[HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
device to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-
RAM disc is completed, the playback becomes possible.
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB
File format
MP3
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
§7
device to HDD.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD is
completed, the playback becomes possible.
SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile
Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
Number of
folders
Maximum number of folders recognizable (except
for HDD): 300 folders (including the root folder)
Number of
files (tracks)
§8
Maximum number of files recognizable(except for
HDD): 3000 files
§9
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
Bit rates
32 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling
frequency
16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz
ID3 tags
compatible
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,
play may not be possible.
RQT9439
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play DivX, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending on the method of
writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Structure of MP3, still picture or DivX folders
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order you want to play them.
Files inside a folder are displayed in the order they were updated or
taken.
MP3
Still picture
DivX
Root
Root
Root
001 Folder
P000000 .divx
P0000002.divx
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
(file=track)
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
002 Folder
002 Folder
P0000003.divx
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
002 Folder
P0000004.divx
P0000005.divx
001track.mp3
003 Folder
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
003 Folder
003 Folder
P0000006.divx
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
P0000007.divx
P0000008.divx
P0000009.divx
004 Folder
004 Folder
Order of play
P00000 0.divx
P00000 .divx
P00000 2.divx
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
Order of play
Order of play
[RAM]
[SD]
¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters
¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters
Root
Card
XXXX.JPG
JPEG
DCIM
DCIM
XXXXX
XXXXX
(Picture folder)
XXXX.JPG
XXXX.JPG
Any folder with JPEG files
e.g.,
001
1
DCIM
XXXXX
P0000001.JPG
P0000002.JPG
XXXX.JPG
(MPEG2 folder)
SD_VIDEO
PRG
§1
Folders can be created on other equipment. However, these
folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.
≥If a folder name or file name has been input using other
equipment, the name may not be displayed properly or you may
not be able to play or edit the data.
MOV.MOD
MOV.MOI
PRG.PGI
MGR_INFO
(MPEG2 information folder)
PRIVATE
AVCHD
(AVCHD folder)
RQT9439
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
AVCHD
Dynamic range
AVCHD is a new format (standard) for high definition video cameras
that can be used to record and play high-resolution HD images.
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
Bitstream
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.
CI (Common Interface)
Common Interface is a defined standard, to enable the addition of a
CAM (Conditional Access Module) in a Digital TV/Recorder.
Film and video
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
CI Plus
CI Plus is a technical specification that adds additional security and
features to the proven DVB Common Interface Standard that will
allow CI Plus compatible consumer electronics devices, such as
Integrated Digital Televisions and Set Top Boxes, access to a wide
range of Pay TV Services via a Plug-in CI Plus CAM wherever the CI
Plus Technology is supported by the local Pay TV Provider.
Film:
Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs
recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL
discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs).
Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or
animation.
Video:
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,
etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can
finalise DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R
DL on this unit.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on discs to normal. This
is called decoding.
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for
recording again.
Deep Colour
This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology
that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when
connected to a compatible TV.
Formatting
You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with
smooth, detailed gradation and minimal colour banding.
[A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be
reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep
Colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the
connected TV.]
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW, SD cards and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
DiSEqC (Digital Satellite Equipment Control)
Digital Satellite Equipment Control is a control system for selecting
several LNBs at one input.
DivX
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX
media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality
that maintains a relatively small file size.
Frame
Field
Field
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance)
DLNA is a standard that makes DLNA Certified digital electronics
easier and more convenient to use on a home network.
≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
DNS Server
Gateway
A server which acts like a telephone directory and translates Internet
domain names into IP addresses.
IP address of the electronic device providing Internet access.
Usually called a router IP address. (e.g., 192.168.0.1)
Dolby Digital
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio.
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
Dolby Digital Plus
Multi-channel audio and higher audio quality is made possible using
Dolby Digital Plus.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-
definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]
from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high
definition compatible television is required.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into fewer channels.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
IP address
A set of numbers which distinguish each PC on the network when,
for example, connected to the Internet. When using a PC in a LAN to
access a PC or device that is not included in the LAN, the IP address
is called the local IP address. (e.g., 192.168.0.10)
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
LAN (Local Area Network)
A group of linked devices in a company, school or home.
Indicates the boundaries of a particular network.
LNB (Low Noise Block - converter)
This is attached to the satellite dish, which will amplify the weak
signal that was received, lower the frequency, and input into the
tuner.
RQT9439
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs.
1080i
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic
and rich image.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting.
1080p
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 is an encoding method used for recording of
the high definition videos.
720p
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.
Letterbox:
Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the picture
itself appears in an aspect ratio of
16:9.
Progressive/Interlace
Interlace is a conventional image signal that displays the image in 2
phases by splitting the display into odd and even scans.
Progressive will display whole image in 1 scan. Therefore, it will give
high definition image without flickering compared with interlace.
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Router
Distinguishes the IP address assigned to each device, such as the
PC, and relays the flow of data within the network.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered
values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the
quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels
you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time
(day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial,
etc.
Subnet mask
Enables efficient network use. A set of numbers which identify which
part of the IP address allocated to every device connected to the
router is the network portion.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
Transponder
The signals of a broadcasting station are received by a transponder
on a satellite. The transponder converts them to frequencies and
sends them to satellite dishes near the ground. A transponder can
broadcast several TV and radio programmes or data in parallel.
x.v.ColourTM
x.v.ColourTM is a name for devices that are compatible with the
xvYCC format, an international standard for expanded colour in
motion pictures, and that follow the rules for signal transmission.
You can enjoy vivid colours of wider colour ranges for a more
realistic picture when connected to a TV that supports the
x.v.ColourTM with HDMI cable.
RQT9439
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety precautions
Placement
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are
registered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS
logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #: 5,451,942 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and
the Symbol are registered trademarks and DTS Digital Out and
the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes
software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
AC mains lead protection
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Foreign matter
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC
in the United States and other countries.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license for
the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to (i)
encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard ("AVC
Video") and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a
consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity
and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide
AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other
use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC.
See http://www.mpegla.com.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Service
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
“AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Panasonic
Corporation and Sony Corporation.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
DiSEqCTM is a trademark of EUTELSAT.
Plays DivX® video
DivX® is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under
license.
x.v.ColourTM is a trademark.
VIERA CASTTM is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
YouTube and Picasa are trademarks of Google, Inc.
RQT9439
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gracenote® Corporate Description
The “CI Plus” Logo is a trademark of CI Plus LLP.
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by
Gracenote®
. Gracenote is the industry standard in music
DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIEDTM are trademarks,
service marks, or certification marks of the Digital Living Network
Alliance.
recognition technology and related content delivery.
For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
Gracenote® Proprietary Legends
This product incorporates the following software:
(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic
Corporation,
(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic
Corporation,
(3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License,
Version 2 (GPL v2),
(4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public
License, Version 2.1 (LGPL v2.1) and/or,
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
2000–2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright ©
2000–2009 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one
or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:
#6,304,523.
(5) open sourced software other than the software licensed under
the GPL v2 and/or LGPL v2.1
For the software categorized as (3) and (4), please refer to the
terms and conditions of GPL v2 and LGPL v2.1, as the case may
be at
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html and
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
In addition, the software categorized as (3) and (4) are
copyrighted by several individuals. Please refer to the copyright
notice of those individuals at
Gracenote® End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS
BELOW.
http://www.am-linux.jp/dl/JPRCBW93
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the
“Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or
file identification and obtain music-related information, including name,
artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online
servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”)
and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by
means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device.
The GPL/LGPL software is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
At least three (3) years from delivery of products, Panasonic will
give to any third party who contact us at the contact information
provided below, for a charge no more than our cost of physically
performing source code distribution, a complete machine-
readable copy of the corresponding source code covered under
GPL v2/LGPL v2.1.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use
only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT
TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
Contact Information
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease
any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any
payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you
directly in its own name.
Source code is also freely available to you and any other member
of the public via our website below.
http://www.am-linux.jp/dl/JPRCBW93
The recording and playback of content on this or any other
device may require permission from the owner of the copyright or
other such rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to
and does not grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims
any right, ability or intention to obtain such permission on your
behalf. It is your responsibility to ensure that your use of this or
any other device complies with applicable copyright legislation in
your country. Please refer to that legislation for more information
on the relevant laws and regulations involved or contact the
owner of the rights in the content you wish to record or playback.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web
page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are
licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied,
regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the
Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that
Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or
additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the
future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
RQT9439
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Digital broadcast
Adjust the audio quality (Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Adjust the picture quality (Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Album (Music)
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Album (Still picture)
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Audio
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
AVCHD
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 85
Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Sub Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 85
Update Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Discs
Disc Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Discs that cannot be played . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Discs you can use for recording and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
DiSEqC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Display
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 43, 112, 113, 114
DLNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 114
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
AV2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
CAM (Conditional Access Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Channel
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Chapter Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 86
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
CI Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 19, 30, 94, 114
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 19, 90
Connection
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 97
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Digital Audio Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 98
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Set Top Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 96, 98
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
VIDEO terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Copy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
DR (Direct Recording mode)
DR File Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Edit
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 70
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 114
Flexible Recording via AV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 114
FUNCTION MENU display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
HD Video
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
HDD
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Connecting with a receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Connecting with a television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 98
Settings (HDMI Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 86
HOLD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
HD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 48–54
Copy Title Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Country setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 113, 114
Language
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 85
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 85
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 85
Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(Set Top Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
LNB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 114
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 115
Deep Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Delete
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
All titles (Discs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
All titles (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Digital Audio Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Menu
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Mode
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
RQT9439
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MPEG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Music
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70
Play (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Play (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Play (Music on HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
SD card
Copy (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Play (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Play (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SD Video
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Smart Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Software (firmware) Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Still picture
Name
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Network
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
DLNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 114
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
One Touch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
On-screen
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Subtitle
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Playing back
DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
HD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Playlist
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 115
Properties
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Protection
itch the audio/subtitles on the disc (Disc menu) . . . . . . . . 77
Sw
Teletext
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Timer recording
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Manual Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Using the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Title
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 48–54
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 115
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 36
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Update Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
USB
Ratings level
Copy (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Play (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
EXT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Flexible Recording via AV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 33–36
Recording to discs from external equipment
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Flexible Recording via AV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
VIERA CASTTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
VIERA Link (HDAVI Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 98
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 73
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
x.v.ColourTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
2 programmes simultaneous recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 32
RQT9439
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products
and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points,
in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential
negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your
waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or
dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the
Directive for the chemical involved.
Cd
This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please
increase separation between the product and the mobile
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
telephone.
CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and
easily accessible.
The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily
operable.
To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains,
disconnect the power supply cord plug from AC receptacle.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR
PRODUCT DAMAGE,
≥DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,
DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS
FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE
PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.
≥USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.
≥DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE ARE
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION!
≥DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY
OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE
VENTILATION VENTS.
≥DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS
WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND
SIMILAR ITEMS.
≥DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS
LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.
(Inside of product)
≥DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY MANNER.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
EU
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.
Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.
Panasonic Corporation
p
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
RQT9439-L
F0110MD0
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
© Panasonic Corporation 2010
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|